JP2023045663A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a suitable play-time inrush suggestive performance.SOLUTION: A play-time inrush is suggested by using a reservation display in the play-time inrush.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-29

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines have been disclosed that execute an effect related to entering a play time (time saving state b).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-62305

There is room for improvement with respect to the gaming machine that executes the effects described in Patent Document 1.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to improve the entertainment of the performance at the time of entry into play time.

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state,
a pending storage means for storing, as pending storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
a state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state;
production control means capable of executing production;
A first production mode, a second production mode different from the first production mode, and production mode control means that can be controlled,
The state control means can control to the special state when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times,
The production control means is
When it is controlled to the first production mode,
When the determining means determines that the control is to be in the advantageous state, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed,
when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed;
When it is controlled to the second production mode,
When the determination means determines that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the specific effect is not executed before the variable display is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after being controlled to the advantageous state, when the number of executions of variable display reaches the predetermined number of times, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed.

According to such a configuration, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the interest of the specific effect can be preferably improved according to the player's taste.

In addition, the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention and the configuration other than the matters specifying the invention. may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot classification table in the characteristic part 04TM. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables, and (3), (4) and (5) are explanatory diagrams showing big hit type determination tables. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing in a 1st embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the game flow in the first embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of a start winning effect determination process in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table referred to in the start winning effect determination process in the first embodiment; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding zone production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of an effect determination process at the start of fluctuation in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table referred to in the process of determining effect at the time of fluctuation start in the first embodiment; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding a 1st conversation announcement production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the first conversation preview presentation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the first conversation preview presentation; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding the 2nd conversation announcement production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a second conversation preview presentation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a second conversation preview presentation; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding the battle conversation announcement production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode relating to a battle conversation announcement production; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding normal background chance up production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a start winning effect determination process in the second embodiment. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of second special determination processing in the 2A embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table referred to in second special determination processing in the 2A embodiment; It is an explanatory diagram showing a condition table relating to whether or not the arrival suspension effect and the fixed suspension effect are executed in the second special determination process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to the corresponding display of the dream-dream mode; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding arrival suspension production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding arrival suspension production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the fixed pending|holding production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the fixed pending|holding production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an effect determination process at the start of variation in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table referred to in the process of determining effect at the time of fluctuation start in the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a fixed cut-in effect; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of second special determination processing in the 2B embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing a condition table related to the presence or absence of execution of arrival suspension effect and determination suspension effect in the second special determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the case where the start winning prize which reaches relief time reduction occurs in the state with the pending|holding which becomes a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the case where relief time reduction arrival|attainment and the start winning prize which become a big hit generate|occur|produce in the state with the pending|holding which becomes a big hit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display presence/absence determination table for displaying a specific number of times; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning effect determination process in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of third special determination processing in the 3A embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of third special determination processing in the 3B embodiment; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding resurrection production|presentation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit FF production decision processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding promotion production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the jackpot FF period when the fixed pending|holding production|presentation is performed. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of a start winning effect determination process in the fourth embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 4th special judgment processing in a 4th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding production|presentation mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to an arrival pending effect in the default mode, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a fixed pending effect in the default mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to an arrival pending effect in the look-ahead OFF mode, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a effect mode related to a fixed pending effect in the look-ahead OFF mode.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The suspended display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display. Further, the suspended display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol whose execution is suspended is called "first suspended display", and the suspended display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol whose execution is suspended is " This is referred to as "second pending display". Note that the first pending display and the second pending display are appropriately collectively referred to as "holding display".

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that control is performed to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being "big hit". However, not limited to such a form, the display result of the variable display of the special symbols may be controlled to the time-saving state based on an opportunity other than the "jackpot".

For example, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbols, "loss with time saving" may be provided. When the winning pattern with time saving is stop-displayed, the time saving control is controlled to the time saving state C (for example, chance time of 7 times of time saving times) in which the time saving control is performed for the first predetermined number of times. In addition, when 500 fluctuations are performed without being controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state, time-saving control is performed a second predetermined number of times. . However, even if the variation is repeated 500 times without being controlled to a big hit in the low-probability state after the time-saving state B ends, the time-saving state B is not controlled again based on this.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (ReadOnlyMemory) 101, a RAM (RandomAccessMemory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (VideoRAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 152F)
Next, the characteristic portion 152F of this embodiment will be described. As for the characteristic portion 152F, a technique for a pachinko machine capable of setting, by setting means, setting values such as the odds of winning a jackpot with different degrees of advantage for the player will be described. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player as the set value of the winning probability of the big win. .

First, setting values will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the odds of winning a jackpot change depending on the set value when a person on the game hall side (such as a store clerk at the game hall) changes settings using operating means such as predetermined switches. It is configured.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed to change the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, the setting change process that allows the probability of winning the big hit to be changed is executed. The set value consists of six stages (multiple stages) from 1 to 6, for example, and the probability of winning a big hit increases in the order of set value 1<set value 2<set value 3<set value 4<set value 5<set value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the degree of advantage increases in the order of setting value 2<setting value 3<setting value 4<setting value 5<setting value 6. increase step by step. It should be noted that the set values are not limited to six stages as long as they are provided in a plurality of stages. Since the ball output rate (the number of balls output per unit time (the number of prize balls)) changes in accordance with the possibility of changing the winning probability of the big hit in this way, changing the setting value changes the ball output rate. It can also be said that it is to do.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six levels of setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 are called high setting with a high probability of winning a big win, and setting values 1 to 3 are called low setting with a low probability of winning a big win.

Also, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may be changed by setting the set values 1 to 6 in the same manner as the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win. The selection probability of the variation pattern may be changed by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6 as well as the winning probability of the big win.

Regarding the characteristic portion 152F, in a pachinko game machine in which any one of a plurality of set values can be set, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is hit (jackpot or small hit). There is a case where a hold series in which hold information determined to be controlled by hit is stored is executed. Concretely, the pending series is the pending information that exists when the big win occurs, and there is pending information that will become a hit in the future, and after the big win gaming state ends, the pending information that existed when the big win occurred. It refers to continuous hits within the reservation information range in which the next hits occur continuously within the range of (reserved). In the case of a small win, a big win via a small win is made based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserve information of a small win can be said to be the reserve storage information of a win that will become a big win in the future. When such a holding series is executed, there is a case where an informing effect for informing that it is a holding series is executed.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F, the same reference numerals and explanations as those in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 are omitted, and different parts will be explained.

In the game area where the hit game ball can flow down, the first path of the downflow path for the game ball is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. A second route, which is different from the first route, is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the image display device 5 as viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right hitting. The first path may be called a left-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area. Also, the second path may be called a right-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the right side of the game area.

Note that the first route and the second route may be composed of different routes, or may be a route in which a part is shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 and the arrangement of the game nails in the game area.

The game ball fired from the ball shooting device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area is guided to the left game area along, for example, the arrangement of the game nails. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided as a structure into which game balls hit in the left game area of the game areas can enter. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5 . The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting opening switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V judgment winning device 87 are provided as structures into which game balls hit into the right game region of the game regions can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second starting winning hole in which game balls can win. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered the respective passage gates 41, there is a gate switch 21 inside the passage gate 41, a second start opening switch 22B inside the second start winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87. A V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure into which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, normal symbols are variably displayed. The normal pattern will be described later. In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for judging V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and a state in which a game ball passes through it can be visually recognized. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width that allows game balls to pass in the front-rear direction at the top, and walls are formed on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A part is provided, and a guide path along which game balls are guided is formed. In the central part of the guide, when a small hit is made, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 times open period + 1 second closed period (interval period) × 9 times + 1 second end period) By repeating opening and closing, an operation opening is formed as an opening that allows a total of about 10 or more game balls to win within a predetermined period of time during which the opening is open. In the path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball to be guided are provided on both sides of the wall portion in a manner that alternately protrudes, so that when hitting to the right A structure (hereinafter referred to as deceleration structure) is formed in which the game balls slowly flow through the passage above the operation opening of the upper portion of the V judgment winning device 87 .

In the small hit game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until it is detected that 10 game balls have entered the V judgment winning device 87, or until a predetermined period of time elapses. Opening control is executed. In the V-judgment winning device 87 , the portion of the guideway where the operating opening is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873 . A movable portion 872 capable of moving back and forth over the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. In the state where the operation port is closed by the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened by the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port is opened in the guideway, so that the game ball guided to the guideway can drop from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 (actuation opening), a V prize winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center of the bottom of the V judgment prize winning device 87 in the horizontal direction as a prize winning region in which a game ball entering from the operation opening can win. Further, an inclined path is provided to guide all the game balls entered from the operation opening onto the V winning area 870 by an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide downward the gaming ball entering from the V winning opening.

At the uppermost end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided. there is The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 22 and is capable of advancing and retreating to open and close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is opened by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 can drop into the V winning area 870 . On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening is closed by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. , and can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state. When the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87 a provided in the V winning area 870 . In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning prize area 870 after that is within the winning ball area. will enter the A game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected by the V judgment prize switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment prize prize switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V winning switch 87a and the V determination winning switch 15a reaches 10, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 opened in the small winning game state is closed, and the game ball enters. made impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge in the lower part, and a game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is discharged into a predetermined area inside the game board 2. It is discharged to the discharge channel. The discharge passage is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b capable of detecting discharged game balls, and all the discharged game balls are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, the game ball enters the V prize winning region 870 and is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a during a predetermined effective period. , the conditions for generating a big hit are established, and the game is controlled to a big-hit game state. Winning of a game ball to such a V winning area 870 is called V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, during the period in which a small hit occurs and the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened as described above, a total of about 10 game balls are produced on average without requiring any special operation. can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area It is structurally designed to enter the 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, right-hand hitting promotion notification is executed to instruct right-hand hitting so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. be.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, except when the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 and when the player hits to the left, it is possible to hit to the right. In this case, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big hit will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure is shown. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operation opening that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small winning game state In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operation opening is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87.例文帳に追加Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a game ball hit into the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that a game ball hit into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the game area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Also, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nail being planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered with a rectangular door, and when a big hit occurs, the solenoid tilts the door forward about the bottom side to reveal the big winning opening ( opening). Inside the special variable winning ball device 7, a count switch 23 is provided for detecting entering game balls. To the special variable winning ball device 7, a winning route is defined by a game nail or other structures so that a game ball can enter the big winning opening only when the game ball is hit in the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that even if the game ball is struck in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win the big prize opening.

In the above-described embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 having the big winning hole and the V determination winning device 87 for determining V winning have been shown as different devices. However, the special variable winning ball device 7 having the big winning hole and the V determination winning device 87 for determining V winning may be a common device.

For example, a V determination winning device 87 for determining V winning may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 having the big winning opening. In this case, the game ball entering the big winning hole enters the V judgment winning device 87 as it is.

The big hit is when the big win pattern (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when the big win pattern (big win display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. occurs in When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting winning hole, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big hit is also generated when a game ball entered while the operation opening of the V judgment prize device 87 is open due to the small win game state entering the V prize area 870. - 特許庁Hereinafter, when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, this is referred to as V winning. A small win is a win in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operation opening is opened is called a "small hit game state". Then, in the small win game state, a big win generated based on the fact that the game ball wins V is called a "big win via a small win". On the other hand, a big hit game state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is called "big hit by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player as a given value, and the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state for a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. Repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a predetermined condition for terminating the open state (a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the establishment of the opening end condition that the winning ball of 1) has been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is established, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is established (for example, the game ball is After passing (including winning) the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening as the starting winning area, the condition for starting the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is The game is started based on establishment of a state of non-execution and non-execution of a jackpot game, and after a fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, a display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes the game ball entering (winning) the winning opening. is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means finally stopping display (determined display) of the pattern (an example of the identification information).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, it is still started within the range of the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information about variable displays for which the conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "reserved storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been retained. A pending memory is also called a starting memory or a starting winning memory.

As for the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening. As for the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening. When a big win occurs in a state where such a first reserve memory or a second reserve memory exists, the reserve memory that existed before the occurrence of the big win is maintained as it is, and a variable display is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. used for

When the second start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, even if there is a pending memory of the first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning is preferentially executed. be. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special 2 priority digestion" as appropriate).

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which Special 2 priority digestion is performed has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and Special 2 priority digestion may not be performed.

For example, (A) the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed with priority over the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special 1 priority digestion" as appropriate), (B) The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed at the same time (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "special 1 special 2 simultaneous digestion").

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a second reserve consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls entering the second start winning opening, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second holding indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit up by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, there is provided a first reservation display 25A consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening, that is, the first reservation memory number. . The first pending indicator 25A increases the number of indicator lights by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game balls so as to selectively use "left shot" aiming at the left game area and "right shot" aiming at the right game area. A game state and a performance state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts playing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player takes a seat in the pachinko game machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball wins the first start winning hole by striking to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a big hit (big hit by the special symbol), the left-hand shot is switched to the right-hand shot, and the game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 which is opened. . After the jackpot game state is over, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a message such as “Aim right” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 .

During the jackpot game state, a game is played aiming at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by striking to the right. During the jackpot game state, right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state is over, the game is continued by hitting to the right when the later-described time-saving state is reached. After the jackpot game is finished, if the time saving state is set, the time saving notification for notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加In addition, during the time saving state, right-handed promotion information is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hit is switched to the left-hand hit by the end of the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state, and the game ball wins the first start prize-winning port. Play games like this. In addition, when the time saving state does not occur, left-handed promotion notification (also called left-handed notification) is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to return to left handed and play the game. may

During the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole by striking to the right. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole and the display result is a big win (a big win by a special symbol), the game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right. Also, if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening and the display result becomes a small winning display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the small winning game state, so V judgment is made while striking to the right. A game is played aiming at the winning device 87 . At the start of the small-hit game state, a small-hit start notification is provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the start of the small-hit game state. In addition, when it is controlled to the small hit game state, the start timing of the small hit display executed before the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the game situation (depending on the game situation) , or at a predetermined timing before the execution of the small hit display), the right hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the open state due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operation opening into the V judgment prize winning device 87, enters the V prize winning area 870 and is detected, When a V prize is generated, a big win is generated via a small win. When the V winning occurs, the V winning notification for notifying that the V winning has occurred is performed on the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁Further, when the small-hit game state ends, a small-hit end notification for notifying that the small-hit game state has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 . After the end of the small win, a big win game state is entered and the special variable winning ball device 7 is released, so the player plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right.

Further, when a game is played aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win is performed. does not occur. Thus, when V winning is not generated during the small winning game state, V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Further, at the end of the small winning game state, a small winning end notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning game state has ended. After the end of the small winning game state, when the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while striking to the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played so that the game ball wins in the first start prize-winning hole by switching from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting. At the end of the time-saving state, a time-saving end notification for notifying that the time-saving is completed on the screen of the image display device 5 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to left-handed and play the game are performed.

FIG. 8-2 is a diagram showing a winning type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, conditions for occurrence of a big win, a control state (game state) after a big win, the number of openings (number of rounds) in a big win, and the opening time of each round in a big win. In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, the pattern 15R short-time big hit, the pattern 4R short-time big hit, the small hit via 16 (15) R short-time big hit, the small hit 9 (8) R short-time big hit, and the small hit 5 (4) ) R time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game control state after the end of the small hit game state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) is the same as before the small hit. In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is open, the game ball is entered into the operation port, and the game ball enters the V prize area 870 inside the V determination prize winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. do. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R-time short jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R-time short jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R-short time jackpots via small hits with different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. be A small hit that is linked so as to be a 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9 (8) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the second small hit. 5 (4) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the third small win.

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. The symbol jackpot includes a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. It includes a big hit via a small hit. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous to the player in this embodiment also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 .

The pattern 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The pattern 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). In the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 16 rounds, but the number of openings of the big prize opening is actually 15 times, and the player can win the same big hit as the pattern 15R short time jackpot with regard to opening the big prize opening. I feel categorical. 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the big jackpot is opened 8 times (8R) under the condition of V prize after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times). is. In the 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 4 times (4R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 5 rounds, but the number of times the big prize opening is actually opened is 4, and the player can get the same big hit as the pattern 4R short time jackpot with regard to the opening of the big prize opening. I feel categorical.

The time-saving state after the symbol 4R time-saving big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1, and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times. Two end states are set for . The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is once is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically, the time-saving state (including electric power supply state) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to variably display the second special symbol, It is necessary to make the game ball enter the passage gate 41 by striking to the right to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and to make the game ball win the variable winning ball device 6B in that state, such a variable winning ball device. It may take a long time to win the game ball to 6B, and the first special symbol retained and stored may be variably displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start winning, which can be stored up to four before the game state, one of the second special symbols which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display for batches can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined to be an advantageous big hit for the player. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After the big hit other than the 4R time-saving big hit, the end condition is that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is seven times, and the end condition is that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 4R short time big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, 7 of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the variable display of the variable number of times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a big win advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is provided so that the game ball can win from the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win a prize from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when the game ball flows down. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more likely to flow down the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than when the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the comparison of advantages is not limited to this. and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning slot than the second path, and the high base state, the big win game state, and the small In other states such as a winning game state, the second route is more likely to win the variable winning slot than the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and in other game states, it is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 8-3 shows the random number type, update range, use, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not to give a big hit and whether or not to give a small win. The random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Type of jackpot (type, pattern 15R short-time jackpot, pattern 4R short-time jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R short-time jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R short-time jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Any type of R time-saving jackpot) and a jackpot pattern are determined (for jackpot type determination, jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the variation pattern (for determining the type of variation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design (for normal design hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the big hits in the specific game state are a symbol 15R short time big hit, a symbol 4R short time big hit, a small win via a 16 (15) R short time big hit, a small win via a 9 (8) R short time big hit, and a small hit. A plurality of types of Via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpots are included. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the random number for judging the hit (random R), or when it is determined to be a small hit, based on the value of the random number for judging the big hit type (random 1) Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big win via a small win, the decided big win becomes invalid unless a V winning occurs. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, the random number 1 is also the random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Also, when it is determined to be the type of the small hit, the design of the small hit is determined at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a small winning symbol determination random number.

In addition, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2), and uses the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3), any included in the determined variation pattern type Determine the variation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type without reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with reach.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special prize determination table, a second special prize determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure hit determination table. The first special symbol winning judgment table is a data table for making a big winning judgment with respect to the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big winning judgment value to be compared with the random R is set. "Probability" shown in FIG. 8-4(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6.

FIG. 8-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special figure per determination table. The second special hit determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit with respect to the second special symbol, and is set with a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R. It is a table with The upper stage in FIG. 8-4(B) is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower stage in FIG. 8-4(B) is the small hit determination table portion. The "probability" shown in the upper part of Fig. 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower part of Fig. 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the set value. In addition, you may provide a small hit in the 1st special design. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening (second starting winning), the random number circuit 124 is activated at a predetermined timing. is extracted (random R). As for the first start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the first special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the big hit judgment values, a big hit is given with respect to the first special pattern. to decide. As for the second start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the second special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches any one of the big hit judgment values, the second special pattern is given a big hit. to decide. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit determination value set in the second special hit determination table, and the extracted value matches any of the small hit determination values. If they match, it is decided to make a small win with respect to the second special symbol. Determining to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless a V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

8-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 8-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 8-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination, "symbol 15R short time jackpot" and "symbol 4R short time jackpot" A big hit determination value corresponding to each of the and is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to the “symbol 15R time-saving jackpot”, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (C) and (D), the big hit type determination value is also used as a judgment value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit design of the first special design and the second special design. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "8R short-time jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

In the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (E), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for judging the big hit type, "16 (15) R short time big hit via small hit" and " A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "9 (8) R short time big hit via small hit" and "5 (4) R short time big hit via small hit" is set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot via jackpot type determination table are the first jackpot (16 (15) R time short jackpot) and the second jackpot (9 (8) R time short jackpot). , is a temporary jackpot type linked to each of the third jackpots (5 (4) R short-time jackpots), and is invalid if V winning does not occur in the jackpot game state.

8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 8-5 and 8-6 show the relationship between the specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the specified contents of the command. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state.

Main commands will be explained in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6. The command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) specifying a variation pattern to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the command 80XX(H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect display device to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result specifying commands that indicate display results including loss display results, big hit types, big hit display results for each small hit type, and small hit display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. The command 8F00(H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A1XX(H) is a special prize opening designation command indicating that the special prize opening is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a post-opening big winning hole designation command indicating after opening (closing) the big winning hole for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the game state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designation command that designates the first reserved storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved storage quantity designation command for designating a second reserved storage quantity. "XX" in the command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100, when subtracting the number of reserved memories, transmits a reserved memory number designation command that designates the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but not limited to this, For each of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count, a reserved memory count subtraction designation command may be used that designates subtraction of 1 from the reserved memory count.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will occur, whether or not a small win will occur, and the determination result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

The command C401 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. The command C402(H) is a command designating the start of the second small hit. The command C403 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C501 (H) is a command designating the end of the first small hit. The command C502(H) is a command to end the second small hit. The command C503 (H) is a command to end the third small hit. The command C601(H) is a V prize designation command that designates that there is a V prize. Command C602(H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that designates detection of winning balls (both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls) to the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first pending storage buffer for storing the pending storage information of the first special symbol. In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the first reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

As for the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second reserved storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the second special symbol. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the second reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) as a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning of the first start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Execute the process to (store). Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the first start winning slot. In addition, based on the winning of the second start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second reserve storage buffer. Executes the process of saving (storing) to Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserve storage buffer based on the winning of the second start winning slot.

Such storage of information relating to starting winnings in the pending storage buffer may be referred to as "stored pending." In addition, the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the reservation storage buffer at the time of the start winning, but at the start of the variation of the special symbol. You may make it extract.

FIG. 8-7 is a flow chart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process of S101. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of first reserved memories for counting the number of first reserved memories). whether the value of the number counter is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, the random number for judging the jackpot (random R), the random number for deciding the jackpot type (random 1), the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern type (random 2), and the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a prize-winning effect process for judging in advance the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected first special symbol starting prize is executed thereafter (S1215).

In this embodiment, after the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning opening are stored as reserved storage information, the start condition for the variable display is When established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal process (S110), based on the reserved storage information, the variable display result for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to start the variable display is determined as a big hit display result and the big hit type is determined based on the big hit determination value and the big hit type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S111) is based on the variation pattern type determination value set corresponding to the various random values and the variation pattern determination value. based on

On the other hand, apart from such determination, the timing before the start of the variable display based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, specifically, the game ball is the first starting winning opening Or at the timing of the start winning in the second start winning opening (the timing at which the retention memory information is stored), read ahead the retention memory information that stores the various data obtained at the time of the start winning, and based on the prefetched retention memory information Then, determination of whether or not a big win will occur, determination of whether or not a small win will occur, determination of the type of the big win, and determination of the type of variation pattern will be performed in advance according to the above-described various random numbers. Based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the variation pattern type determination value, a prize-winning effect process for prefetching determination is executed. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the result of the variable display in advance before the variable display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of the start winning, the variable display of the performance symbols. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that gives a notice of a big win (possibility of a big win) during the game.

Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1216), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1218), sets the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the first reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1219).

By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 each time the start winning opening is started.

Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command and A set of four commands of the first reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second starter switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second starter switch 22B is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of second reserved memories for counting the number of second reserved memories). whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated.

If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for jackpot determination (random R), a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the winning effect processing similar to the winning effect processing described in S1215 for the detected starting winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1226), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1228), sets the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the second reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1229).

By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Each time a start winning opening is entered, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when the start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start winning designation command and A set of four commands of the second reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process (S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer in S51, the process (S80) for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer (S52). If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. will be On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. is done.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved storage, Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved storage.

Next, in RAM 102, CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer of RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. It stores in the random number buffer of RAM102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of the save area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 store each random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like Also, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number=1, 2, 3, 4. It's like

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction (S59). ). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first start winning opening, that is, "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first special symbol. or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second start winning opening, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second special symbol , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processes in the special symbol process process, the process corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, it can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the random number buffer, and executes the judging module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for judging a big hit extracted in S1214 of the starting switch passing process or S1224 of the starting switch passing process and stored in the holding memory buffer or the random number buffer, and judges the big hit. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value or small-hit determination value with a random number for big-hit determination, and executes a process of determining a big-hit or a small-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing a process of judging a big hit or a process of judging a small hit.

In the big hit determination process, if the first special symbol matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the second special symbol will be one of the big hits shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) If it matches the judgment value, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of S61), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big win game state, but it also means to decide whether or not to make the stop pattern on the special pattern display device a big win pattern. .

If it is determined to be a big win in S61 (Y of S61), a big win flag indicating a big win is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", select the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 8-4 (C) (S73), and proceed to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (if it indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (D) (S74). , S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type. Determine (S75) and proceed to S81.

Also, if the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating the "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (variation display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) By using the determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the small hit determination values, thereby performing small hit determination processing (S77). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. do. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. The jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches is determined as the jackpot via small hit type (S80). Then, the process proceeds to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type. "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R short-time jackpot via small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating the 16 (15) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, the 9 (8) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, and the 5 (4) R short-time jackpot via the small hit are the V prizes in the small hit game state. There is data that will be invalid without the occurrence of a big hit if a is not generated, and is provisionally set.

In S82, a special symbol stop symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any one of "1", "5" and "9", which are the small hit patterns corresponding to the small hit type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. do. When the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 8-9 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S118). In the small hit opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable portion 872 in an open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small hit opening mode, and starts the opening operation of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small-hit start designation command indicating that the small-hit game state is started to the effect control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judging winning number counter as counting means in order to use the number of winnings to the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small win as a termination condition of the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment winning number counter is set to "10", and the setting for down-counting the V winning number is performed. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning open process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 8-10 is a flow chart showing the small hit open process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit open control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter for counting the number of V winning prizes is "0" (S431). The V judgment winning ball number counter is set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 8-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit opening control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit open control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is opened by controlling the solenoid 22 corresponding to the time value of the small hit open control timer based on the open mode of the small hit. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not the V prize generated by the game ball entering from the V prize opening into the V prize area 870 which is in the open state inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected, the V prize is detected. It is determined whether or not the switch 87a is on (S434). When it is on in S434, it means that V winning is detected, and the V winning flag which is set when V winning is detected is set (S435). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball entering the V determination winning device 87 wins the V, the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 is closed, and then the game entering the V determination winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not turned on in S434, it means that V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15a is turned on (S438). When it is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and when it is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball counter set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 8-9 is counted down to "-1" (S439), and a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command is transmitted. (S440). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and the game that has entered the determination winning device 87 can be performed. It becomes possible to recognize the number of balls.

When the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter is "0" in S431, it means that the opening end condition of the small prize is satisfied because the number of V winning prizes of the small prize reaches the upper limit value, and When the small-hit open control timer times out in S432, it is when the small-hit opening end condition is established due to the end of the small-hit open control. At these times, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in a closed state, thereby closing the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the mode of opening the small win, the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes ``0''. The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit open control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit open control in the small hit open mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V winning valid period after closing the V judgment winning device 87 is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small winning end process ( S120) is updated (S443), and the process ends. As a result, the timing of the specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the closing of the V judgment winning device 87, is started. By setting the specific period as the V winning valid period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning area for some reason later than the normal passing time, the game ball can be detected. In addition, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally attempts to win a prize in the V winning area, it is only detected during that period, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 8-11 is a flow chart showing the small hit ending process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the process after the end of the small hit, the CPU 103 updates the V winning valid period timer by subtracting -1 (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning valid period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when the V winning is already detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is operated to determine whether or not the V winning caused by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. is turned on (S444). If it is not turned on in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is ON in S444, it means that V winning is detected during the V winning effective period, and a V winning flag indicating that V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

When the V winning valid period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and restore the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V win flag is set in S448, it is determined that the game is a big win, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As described above, in the small winning game state, if the player hits to the right in accordance with the right-handed promotion notification, which will be described later, the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the V judgment winning a prize. Since the game ball that has entered the device 87 always wins the V prize in the V prize area 870, the V prize flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 8-10). A jackpot flag is set and controlled to a jackpot game state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the small win stored in the jackpot provisional type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot will be legally awarded due to the occurrence of the V prize. formally stored in (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5) is set in the big winning hole control timer (S453).

In addition, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, depending on the jackpot type, the number of times of opening (eg, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (eg, 29 seconds), interval The opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as the time (the closing time of the big winning opening between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Of these data, the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the processing is terminated. As a result, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win via the small win stored in the big win provisional type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process is terminated. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small winning game state, the game does not shift to the big winning game state.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 04TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 04TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-53. In this embodiment, after turning on the power to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after the occurrence of a big hit, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 950 times) continuously in a low probability state. If the next big hit does not occur even if it is done, it may be controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state) among a plurality of kinds of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided in order to rescue a player who did not get a big win despite playing the game for a long period of time (for example, to suppress the amount invested in the game). , in this example, it is a game state called "play time".

In the present embodiment, when the time-saving jackpot is controlled among a plurality of types of jackpots, 200 times of variable display is performed in the time-saving state A (low-probability/high-base state) among a plurality of types of time-saving states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations in the time saving state B (low probability / high base state) based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming "0" is a maximum of 200 times, and was controlled to be a time saving big hit. The number of fluctuations in the later time saving state A (low probability / high base state) is also a maximum of 200 times.

[Jackpot type table]
FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing a jackpot type table. The jackpot type table shows, for each jackpot type, conditions for generating a jackpot, a control state (game state) after the jackpot, the number of opening times (number of rounds) in the jackpot, and the opening time of each round in the jackpot. In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, the pattern 3R normal jackpot, the pattern 3R short-time jackpot, the pattern 10R normal jackpot, the pattern 10R short-time jackpot, 10 (9)R normal jackpot via small hit, and 10 (9)R via small jackpot. There is a short time jackpot. The number in parentheses of the big win via the small win indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game control state after the end of the small hit game state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) is the same as before the small hit. In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is open, the game ball is entered into the operation port, and the game ball enters the V prize area 870 inside the V determination prize winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. do. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win. The jackpot via a small hit includes "10 (9) R regular jackpot via a small hit" and "10 (9) R short-time jackpot via a small hit".

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. As the symbol jackpot, the "symbol 3R normal jackpot", "symbol 3R short-time jackpot", "symbol 10R normal jackpot", and "symbol 10R short-time jackpot" are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern. There is.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. It includes a big hit via a small hit.

Of the big wins of the pattern big win and the big win via the small win, the ``3R normal big win in the pattern'', ``10R normal big win in the pattern'' and ``10 (9) normal big win via the small win'' are controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big win game state. It is a jackpot that is controlled to a normal state without being released, and is called a "normal jackpot".

In addition, among the big hits of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via small hits, ``symbol 3R time reduction jackpot'', ``symbol 10R time reduction jackpot'', and ``10 (9) time reduction jackpot via small hit'' are in a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game state. It is a big hit that is controlled by , and is named "time saving big hit".

The advantageous state advantageous to the player in this embodiment also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 . Hereinafter, "symbol 3R normal jackpot" and "symbol 3R short-time jackpot" are appropriately referred to as "3R jackpot", "symbol 10R normal jackpot", "symbol 10R short-time jackpot", "10 (9) R normal jackpot via small hit" , and “10 (9) time-saving big hit via small hit” are appropriately referred to as “10R big hit”.

The “symbol 10R normal jackpot” and the “symbol 10R time-saving jackpot” are jackpots in which the big prize opening is opened ten times (10R). The "symbol 3R normal jackpot" and the "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" are jackpots in which the big prize opening is opened three times (3R). 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 9 times (9R) under the condition of V winning. The winning device is opened for 10 rounds, but the number of openings of the big winning port is actually 9 times. I feel that it is the same type of hit as the 10R time-saving jackpot.

The time-saving state after the "time-saving jackpot" is the end condition that the number of times the variation display of the second special symbol is 200 times, and the end condition that the total number of times the variation display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 204 times ( (not shown) and two end states are set. The number of time-saving end conditions, such as the number of variable display times of the second special symbol being 200 times, takes into account that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as Also, in the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/1.1. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 200 means that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the occurrence of the next big hit (including the big win via the small win) is substantially confirmed. number of times.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is provided so that the game ball can win from the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win a prize from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when the game ball flows down. In addition, in a special state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than when the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the comparison of advantages is not limited to this, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (whether for starting winning or non-starting winning)) are the first. It is provided in the path and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning opening than the second path, and the high base state, the big win game state, and In another state such as a small winning game state, the second route is easier to win the variable winning slot than the first route. It is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down, and in other game states, it is advantageous to the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

[Random value]
FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-2, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number for variation pattern determination Numerical data indicating each of MR3, random number MR4 for judging the result of normal map display, and random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable.

It should be noted that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9B, but the present invention is not limited to this. ~ MR5, values in other ranges may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns, etc. are stored.

[Display result determination table]
FIGS. 9-3 (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 9-3 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "[first special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the first special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for judging a big hit with respect to the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value (not shown) to be compared with the random number MR1 is set. is. "Probability" shown in FIG. 9-3(1) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. In this example, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/319.7.

FIG. 9-3 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "[second special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the second special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit for the second special symbol, and is a big hit judgment value compared with the random number MR1 and a small hit judgment. It is a table in which values (not shown) are set. In FIG. 9-3 (2), the upper stage is the big hit determination table section, and the lower stage is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a small hit.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/319.7. Also, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/1.1. In addition, you may provide a small hit in the 1st special design. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening (second starting winning), the random number circuit 104 is activated at a predetermined timing. to extract the count value (random value MR1). For the first start winning prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the [first special symbol] display result judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the jackpot judgment values, regarding the first special symbol Decide to hit the jackpot. For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the [for the second special symbol] display result judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the jackpot judgment values, regarding the second special symbol Decide to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the [for the second special symbol] display result judgment table, and the extracted value is any small If it matches with the hit determination value, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the second special symbol. Deciding to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

[Jackpot type determination table]
9-3 (3), (4), and (5) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 9-3(3) is a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9-3(4) is a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9-3 (5) is a small hit via big hit type determination table for the second special symbol used for determining the big hit type of the small hit via big hit when it is determined as a small hit by the second special symbol. .

The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol in FIG. 9-3 (3) (hereinafter referred to as "[first special symbol] jackpot type determination table.)" A value to be compared with a big hit determination value corresponding to each of the "symbol 3R normal jackpot" and the "symbol 3R short-time jackpot" is set.

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (3) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to each of the "symbol 3R normal big hit" and the "symbol 3R time saving big hit". The "symbol 3R normal jackpot" has 0 times of time-saving control (that is, no time-saving control), and the "symbol 3R time-saving big hit" has 200 times of time-saving control.

In this example, in the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the "symbol 3R normal jackpot" (50%). , 150 to 299 are assigned to the "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" (50%).

In the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 9-3 (4) (hereinafter referred to as "[second special symbol] jackpot type determination table." A value to be compared with a big hit determination value corresponding to each of the "symbol 10R normal jackpot" and the "symbol 10R short-time jackpot" is set.

In addition, FIG. 9-3 (4) also shows the number of times of time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to each of the "symbol 10R time saving big hit" and the "symbol 10R time saving big hit". The "symbol 10R normal jackpot" has 0 times of time saving control, and the "symbol 10R time saving big hit" has 200 times of time saving control.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 59 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the "symbol 10R normal jackpot" (20%). , 60 to 299 are assigned to the "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (80%).

9-3 (5) for the second special symbol via the jackpot type determination table (hereinafter referred to as "[for the second special symbol] via the jackpot type determination table as appropriate.), jackpot type determination A numerical value to be compared with the value of the random number MR2 for use, which is a big hit determination value corresponding to each of ``10 (9) R regular jackpot via small winning'' and ``10 (9) R short-time jackpot via small winning''. is set.

In addition, in FIG. 9-3 (5), time saving control executed after the big hit corresponding to each of "10 (9) R normal big hit via small hit" and "10 (9) R short time big hit via small hit" is also shown. "10 (9) R normal big hit via small hit" has 0 times of time saving control, and "10 (9) R time saving big hit via small win" has 200 times of time saving control.

In this example, [for the second special symbol] in the big hit type determination table via small hit, 0 to 59 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is "10 (9) R normal big hit via small hit" (20%), and 60 to 299 are assigned to "10 (9) R time-saving big hit via small hit" (80%).

[Variation pattern judgment]
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above in accordance with the predetermined result. Determine the variation pattern.

Here, variation pattern determination in a normal state will be described. Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the [loss] variation pattern determination table used when it is decided in advance that the variation display result will be “lost”, and the variation display result as a “jackpot” A [big win] variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance is prepared in advance.

[For loss] In the variation pattern determination table, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is taken for the “non-reach loss” variation pattern, the “normal reach loss” variation pattern, and the “super reach loss” variation pattern. A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

[For jackpot] In the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", the variation pattern of "super reach A jackpot", and the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot" are random numbers MR3 for variation pattern determination. A predetermined random value within the range that can be taken is assigned as a judgment value.

<Non-reach loss>
In the present embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "loss", the "non-reach failure" variation pattern does not establish the reach state and informs that the final display result is "loss".

<No normal reach>
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern of "normal reach lost" among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "missed", after the reach state is established, at a predetermined opportunity (operation of push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) By displaying a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "323", "545", etc.) corresponding to the display result of "loss", it is notified that the final display result is "loss".

<Normal Reach Jackpot>
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "big hit", in the variation pattern of "normal reach big hit", after the reach state is established, at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) By displaying a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "222", "777", etc.) corresponding to the display result of "big hit", it is notified that the final display result is "big hit".

<Super Reach Lost / Big Hit>
In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern with super reach ("super reach lost", "super reach big hit"), the final The display result is confirmed and stopped.

(Super reach effect (battle effect))
In the present embodiment, among the variation patterns involving super reach, in the variation patterns of "super reach miss", "super reach A jackpot", and "super reach B jackpot", after the reach state is established, it develops into super reach and becomes an ally. A super ready-to-win effect (hereinafter referred to as a "battle effect" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not a "jackpot" is won by a battle between the character and the enemy character.

Here, when the final display result is "lost", an effect (defeat effect) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is a "big win", an effect (victory effect) is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit", the final display result "big hit" is executed by executing the winning effect at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) in the battle effect. ” is reported. In addition, in the variation pattern of the "super reach B jackpot", at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) in the battle presentation, the defeat presentation may be executed and the final display result may be "loss". After being reported (suggested), a resurrection effect is executed, and a victory effect is executed after the resurrection effect, thereby reporting that the final display result is a "big hit".

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "big hit", the variation time of the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" is 45 seconds, the variation time of the variation pattern of "super reach A jackpot" is 120 seconds, The variation time of the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot" is set to 150 seconds (not shown).

FIG. 9-4 is a variation pattern determination table in a normal state. In the present embodiment, a variation pattern determination table is provided according to the value of a relief time reduction counter, which will be described later. FIG. 9-4 (A) is a variation pattern determination table in the normal state (relief time reduction number counter≧5). Further, FIG. 9-4(B) is a variation pattern determination table in the normal state (relief time reduction number counter ≤ 4).

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A1), in the [loss] variation pattern determination table in the normal state (relief time reduction counter ≥ 5), 1 to 900 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out", 901 to 980 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach out", and 981 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach out". ing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A2), in the normal state (relief time reduction counter ≥ 5) [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 50 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach A jackpot", 51 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A jackpot", and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B jackpot". assigned to the pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B1), in the [loss] variation pattern determination table in the normal state (relief time reduction counter ≤ 4), 1 to 900 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out", 901 to 980 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach out", and 981 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach out". ing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B2), in the [big hit] variation pattern determination table in the normal state (relief time reduction counter ≥ 5), 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach big hit" variation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach A big hit" variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A2), when the relief time reduction counter ≥ 5, the revival effect is executed based on the inclusion of the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot" in the variation pattern determination table. It is possible. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B2), when the relief time reduction counter ≤ 4, based on the fact that the variation pattern determination table does not include the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot", resurrection Performance is restricted.

[First embodiment]
[Game control main processing]
FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the first embodiment. In this example, the processing of steps S1 to S7, the processing of steps S8 to S9, and the processing of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processing shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command for instructing recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction. A value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal is set, and control is performed to transmit a recovery time relief time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S04TM71), and the process proceeds to step S10.

In this example, a case is shown in which, at the time of recovery from a power failure, a command for specifying the number of times of recovery time reduction is transmitted separately from the command at the time of recovery, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the EXT data of the recovery command (eg, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened may be set and transmitted. .

Further, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the initial value "950" to the relief time reduction number counter (step S04TM91).

Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "950" is set to the relief time reduction number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, if the big hit does not occur even if the variation display is executed 950 times, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state B is controlled. will be It should be noted that, in this example, since the production control command to instruct the initialization to be transmitted in step S9 and the initial value ("950") set to the relief time reduction number counter correspond to each other, the CPU 103 performs initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the transmission of the directed effect control command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter (“950” in this example), sets the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal, and sets the relief time reduction counter. Control is performed to transmit the number-of-times designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S01TM92), and the process proceeds to step S10.

In this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "950" is set to the relief time reduction counter and initialized. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

[Special symbol normal processing]
FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal processing (step S110) of the special symbol process processing in this embodiment.

In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step S04TM51). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is zero. If the total pending storage number is 0 (step S04TM51: YES), the CPU 103 terminates the process.

When the total reserved storage number is not 0 (step S04TM51: NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step S04TM52). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero.

When the second reserved memory number is not 0 (step S04TM52: NO), the CPU 103 points to the special symbol pointer (whether the special symbol process is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is performed for the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in the flag indicating whether or not the device is connected (step S04TM53). When the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved memory number is accumulated) (step S04TM52: YES), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer. (step S04TM54).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole It may be configured as

Next, after step S04TM53 or step S04TM54, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories indicated by the special symbol pointer=1 in the RAM 102 and saves it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Store (step S04TM55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S04TM56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S04TM57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for winning determination from the random number buffer area (step S04TM58), and executes the big winning determination module (step S04TM59). In this case, the CPU 103 extracts in the starting prize determination process (step S101), reads out the hit determination random number stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see (1) or (2) in FIG. 9-3) with the hit determination random number (MR1), and determines to be a jackpot if they match. It is a program that executes the process to That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values set in FIG. 9-3 (1) or (2).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random MR1 matches the big hit determination value (step S04TM60).

When the random MR1 matches the big hit determination value (that is, when it is determined to be a big hit) (step 04TM60: YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit ( Step S04TM61), the type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type judging random number (MR2) stored in the random number buffer area (3R normal jackpot, 3R short-time jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R short-time jackpot) is determined as the type of jackpot (step S04TM62). Incidentally, in this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step S04TM66.

On the other hand, when the random MR1 does not match the big hit determination value (that is, when it is not determined to be a big hit) (step 04TM60: NO), the CPU 103 causes the special symbol pointer to indicate "second". (step S04TM63). When the special symbol pointer does not indicate "second" (step S04TM63: NO), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S04TM67.

When the special symbol pointer does not indicate "second" (step S04TM63: NO), the CPU 103 executes a small hit determination module (step S04TM631). In this case, the CPU 103 extracts in the starting prize determination process (step S101), reads out the hit determination random number stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs small hit determination. The small hit determination module compares a predetermined small hit determination value (see FIG. 9-3 (2)) with the hit determination random number (MR1), and if they match, decides to make a small hit. It is a program that executes processing. That is, it is a program for executing the small hit determination process. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a small hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the small hit determination values set in FIG. 9-3 (2).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random MR1 matches the small hit determination value (step S04TM64).

When the random MR1 matches the small hit determination value (that is, when it is determined to be a small hit) (step 04TM64: YES), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit. is set (step S04TM641), and the jackpot type via the small hit corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for judging the jackpot type (MR2) stored in the random number buffer area (10R via the normal jackpot, 10R via the small hit time-saving jackpot) is determined as the type of jackpot (step S04TM65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reservation storage buffer or the second reservation storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type via the small hit. . Then, the process proceeds to step S04TM66.

Also, when the random MR1 does not match the small hit determination value (that is, when it is decided to lose) (step 04TM64: NO), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S04TM67.

After step S04TM62 or step S04TM65, CPU 103 stores data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (step S04TM66), and proceeds to step S04TM71.

After step S04TM63: NO or step S04TM64: NO, the CPU 103 determines whether or not either the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step S04TM67). If either the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled) (step S04TM67: YES), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter. (Step S04TM68), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (Step S04TM69).

When the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S04TM69: YES), the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of fluctuation (step S04TM70), step The process proceeds to S04TM71. When the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S04TM69: NO), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S04TM71.

In this example, steps S04TM68 to step S04TM70 are performed before the counting process of the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving after step S04TM71 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter, but such processing It is not limited to modes. For example, after performing the counting process of the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving after step 04TM71, the subtraction process of the time saving number counter may be performed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will save time, if the time saving counter is set to "200" (see step S04TM111 in FIG. 9-9) and then the subtraction process is executed, the time saving counter Since the value is decremented by 1 extra, it may be configured to add 1 to the value of the time saving number counter again after the subtraction process in the variable display that becomes a relief time saving, or the time saving number counter is increased by 1 in advance. 201” may be set.

Step S04TM66, step S04TM67: NO, or after step S04TM70, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter (step S04TM71). Further, in this example, by executing the processing of step S04TM71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving number counter to the EXT data, and performs control to transmit a relief time-saving number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S04TM72).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S04TM73). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S04TM73: NO), the process proceeds to step S04TM75. When the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S04TM73: YES), the CPU 103 indicates that the relief time reduction state B is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction. A determination flag is set (step S04TM74).

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction on the side, and shows a case where the relief time reduction number designation command is transmitted. It is not limited to any form. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction and execute an arrival suspension effect, etc., which will be described later.

Also, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is initialized (set the initial value “950”) at the timing of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, the relief time reduction is performed for the first time. It may be configured to transmit the number of relief time-saving designation command only when the number of relief times is reduced, and not to transmit the number of times of relief time-saving designation command when the relief time is reduced after the second time.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S04TM75). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a "symbol 3R normal jackpot", the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and when it is determined to be a "symbol 3R time-saving big hit", a special symbol. If the stop pattern of is determined to be "3" and it is decided to be "symbol 10R normal jackpot", the stop pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "4" and it is decided to be "symbol 10R short-time jackpot". When it is determined that the stop pattern of the special pattern is ``7'', and when it is decided to make it ``10R normal jackpot via a small hit'', the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided to be ``6'' and ``a small hit''. When it is determined to be a short-time jackpot via 10R, the stop pattern of the special pattern is determined to be ``9'', and when it is determined to be lost, the stop pattern of the special pattern is determined to be ``-''. Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S04TM76).

[Decorative pattern]
In the present embodiment, if the "time saving jackpot" is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, some of the odd decorative patterns (hereinafter referred to as "time saving patterns" as appropriate. In this example, " 333” and “777”) are stopped and displayed together. Also, if it is a "normal jackpot" that is not controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, even number decoration patterns and some odd number decoration patterns (hereinafter referred to as "normal patterns" as appropriate. In this example, "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and "999") are all stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the time-saving design is a number design of "3" or "7", and is a golden decoration design. The normal pattern is a number pattern of "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8" or "9" and is a red decoration pattern.

In this embodiment, when the variable display is started, it is determined which decorative pattern combination is to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display according to the display result (not shown). When the display result is ``ordinary jackpot'', it is determined which of the normal patterns the combination of decoration patterns to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display should be, and when the display result is ``time-saving jackpot''. , It is determined whether the combination of decorative patterns to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is the normal pattern or the time-saving pattern.

At the end of the variable display, the combination of normal patterns is stopped and displayed to notify that it is a ``normal big hit'', and after the end of the variable display, it is finally promoted to the combination of time-saving patterns and is a ``time-saving big hit''. It is possible to execute a promotion effect (see FIG. 9-47) capable of notifying that.

[Retained memory count]
In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning hole), variable display of the first special symbol is started, and the game ball passes through the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole). When passing, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the starting port during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols last time (when the game ball passes through the winning ball device but the variable display of the special symbols cannot be immediately executed based on the passage) , Variable display of special symbols based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit.

In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the first starting port during the execution of the variable display of the previous special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the passage is a maximum (a = 0 to 4). Also, when the game ball passes through the second starting port during the execution of the variable display of the previous special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the passage is up to b (b = 0 to 4) at maximum. Reserved.

In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the first starting port during execution of the previous variable display of special symbols, up to four variable displays of the first special symbols based on the passage are reserved. Further, when the game ball passes through the second starting port during execution of the variable display of the last special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the passage is reserved up to 0 at maximum. That is, not even one variable display of the second special symbol is reserved.

According to such a configuration, in the normal state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended up to a maximum of four, and the execution is suspended. It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect based on the display judgment result (display result, presence or absence of relief time saving, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing in the normal state, in which the frequency of hitting the jackpot is lower than in the time saving state. .

In addition, mainly in the time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the frequency of occurrence of a big hit (big hit via a small hit) is higher than in the normal state by not suspending even one variable display of the second special symbol. In the extremely high time-saving state, the ``normal jackpot'' occurs and falls to the normal state, but the presence of the reserved memory corresponding to the second special symbol causes the jackpot to occur with an extremely high probability, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent a person from becoming too advantageous.

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing.

In the special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step S04TM101), and determines whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step S04TM102). .

When the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, when the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet) (step S04TM102: NO ), the CPU 103 terminates the process.

When the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, when the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended) (step S04TM102: YES) , CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S04TM103).

If the jackpot flag is not set (step S04TM103: NO), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S04TM109.

If the jackpot flag is set (step S04TM103: YES), CPU103, if set, each time-saving flag (time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B), relief time-saving determination flag, and variation during time-saving state A time saving number counter for counting the number of display executions is reset (step S04TM104).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "950" to the relief time reduction number counter (step S04TM105). Therefore, in this example, with the big hit as a trigger, at the end of the big hit variation, the initial value "950" is set to the relief time reduction number counter, and even if the 950 times variation display is performed after the big win game ends, the next big hit will not occur. If it does not occur, it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled to the time reduction state B.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step S04TM104, in the case of a big hit, at the end of the big hit variation, "950" is set to the relief time reduction counter and initialized. It is not limited to such aspects. For example, at the start or end of the jackpot fanfare period, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "950" for initial setting, or the relief time reduction counter may be set to "950" during the round of the jackpot game. It may be initialized, or may be configured to be initialized by setting "950" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command to specify the start of the big hit to the effect control CPU 120 (step S04TM106), and opens the big winning opening until the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are controlled to be open. A timer for the time before opening the big winning opening for measuring the time before (fanfare period) is set (step S04TM107), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big win opening preprocessing (step S144) (step S04TM108).

Moreover, when the jackpot flag is not set (step S04TM103: NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step S04TM109).

When the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step S04TM109: YES), the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step S04TM110), sets the time reduction number counter to "200" (step S04TM111), Control is performed to transmit the state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S04TM112), and the process proceeds to step S04TM117.

In addition, although this example shows an example in which the relief time-saving counter is not set only by controlling the time-saving state B at the timing of the relief time-saving, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to control to the time saving state B at the timing of the relief time saving and also to perform initial setting (set to "950") of the relief time saving number counter.

Also, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, "950" is set, and the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "0". ” is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when setting the relief time-saving number counter, "0" is set, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter is incremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "950". It may be configured so as to generate relief time reduction based on the fact.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step S04TM111, the number of times of variation until relief time reduction occurs (950 times) and 200 times of different values are set as the number of times of time reduction. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in step S04TM111, a value greater than "200" may be set in the time saving counter (for example, "950", which is the same value as the number of fluctuations until relief time saving occurs), or a small value may be set. good.

Further, in step S04TM111, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of times of shortening of working hours may be set in the number of times of shortening of working hours counter. For example, when the first relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "1", and when the second relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "200". good too.

Further, for example, it is configured to determine the number of times of time saving by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step S04TM111, a value corresponding to the number of times of time saving determined by the lottery process may be set in the time saving number counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 1 time with a probability of 10% and may be determined to be 200 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

When the relief time reduction determination flag is not set (step S04TM109: NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction end flag is set (step S04TM113).

When the time saving end flag is not set (step S04TM113: NO), the CPU 103 advances the process to step S04TM117.

When the time saving end flag is set (step S04TM113: YES), the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step S04TM114), and any of the time saving flags that are set (time saving flag A, time saving flag B Either) is reset, the time-saving state is terminated (step S04TM115), control is performed to transmit a normal state designation command (a kind of game state designation command) to the production control CPU 120 (step S04TM116), and the process proceeds to step S04TM117. proceed.

Incidentally, in this example, by executing the processing of steps S04TM113 to S04TM116, in the time-saving final variation, at the end of the symbol determination period, the game shifts to the normal state and the right-handed notification is terminated (not shown). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

Step S04TM112, step S04TM113: NO, or after step S04TM116, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S04TM117).

[state change]
Next, state transitions in this embodiment will be described. 9-10 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

<Normal state>
As shown in Figure 9-10, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), if [X1] "3R normal jackpot" (symbol 3R normal jackpot) occurs, control to the normal state after the jackpot ends be done. Also, when [X2] "3R time-saving big hit" (symbol 3R time-saving big hit) occurs, it is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via big hit (low probability/high base state)).

Furthermore, even if [X3] "lost", if the relief time is shortened ((X31) after RAM clear processing or (X32) after the end of the big hit, the next big hit will not occur. If it reaches 950 times, or (X33) after the time saving state A ends, if the number of fluctuations reaches 750 times without the occurrence of the next big hit), time saving state B (relief time saving via time saving state ( Low Accuracy/High Base State))).

<Time saving state A>
In addition, as shown in Figure 9-10, in the time-saving state A (low probability / high base state) via the big hit, [Y1] "10R time-saving big hit" (symbol 10R time-saving big hit, small hit 10 (9) R time-saving When a big hit occurs, control is made again to the time saving state A after the end of the big hit. Although not shown, even when the "3R time-saving jackpot" occurs in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the game is similarly controlled to the time-saving state A after the jackpot ends.

In addition, when [Y2] "10R normal big hit" (symbol 10R normal big hit, small hit 10 (9) R normal big hit) occurs, or when it is controlled to the time saving state A, the next big hit will not occur. When the number of times reaches 200, it is controlled to the normal state. It should be noted that although not shown, even when the "3R normal jackpot" occurs in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, control is similarly performed to the normal state.

<Time saving state B>
Also, as shown in FIG. 9-10, in the time saving state B (low probability / high base state) via relief time saving, [Z1] "10R time saving big hit" (symbol 10R time saving big hit, small hit via 10 (9) R When a time-saving jackpot) occurs, it is controlled to the time-saving state A after the end of the jackpot. Although not shown, even when the "3R time-saving jackpot" occurs in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the game is similarly controlled to the time-saving state A after the jackpot ends.

In addition, [Z2] "10R normal jackpot" (symbol 10R normal jackpot, small hit via 10 (9) R normal jackpot) occurs, or when it is controlled to time saving state B, the next big hit will not occur. When the number of times reaches 200, it is controlled to the normal state. It should be noted that although not shown, even when the "3R normal jackpot" occurs in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, control is similarly performed to the normal state.

[Production determination process at the time of start winning]
When a start winning occurs, the CPU 103 outputs, out of the determination results at the time of winning, the result of determination as to whether or not it will be a big win, the symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the type of the big win, and from the results of the determination at the time of winning, A variation category command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number addition designation command that designates that the number of reserved memories has increased by 1 (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) and is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 .

FIG. 9-11 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the time of start winning. The effect control CP 120 executes the start winning time effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

In the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first issues a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and , the first reserved storage number addition designation command, or the second reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S04TM1010).

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 stores a set of symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, reserved memory number addition designation commands (first reserved memory number addition designation command, or second It is determined whether or not a reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly stored. If the command for one set of starting winnings has not been newly received (step S04TM1010: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When one set of starting winning command is newly received (step S04TM1010: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number addition designation command is 2. It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied (step S04TM1020).

When the value of the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number addition designation command is not 2 or more (step S04TM1020: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the value of the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number addition designation command is 2 or more (step S04TM1020: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a zone effect limit flag to be described later. It is determined whether or not there is (step S04TM1030).

In this embodiment, the zone effect restriction flag is a kind of flag that is set based on the determination that the zone effect is to be executed. Since the processing of steps S04TM1040 to step S04TM1070 is skipped by setting the zone effect restriction flag, the state where the zone effect has been determined or the zone effect is being executed may not be executed. It is possible to limit the decision to execute the zone performance redundantly in response to one reserved storage. This zone effect limit flag is erased when the variable display which is the subject of notice when the zone effect limit flag is set is finished.

If the zone effect limit flag is set (step S04TM1030: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the zone effect limit flag is not set (step S04TM1030: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the zone effect is executed, a table for determining whether or not the zone effect is executed (see FIG. 9-12). (step S04TM1040).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the zone effect (step S04TM1050).

If it is decided not to execute the zone effect (step S04TM1050: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When it is decided to execute the zone effect (step S04TM1050: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the zone look-ahead counter (step S04TM1060), sets the zone effect limit flag (step S04TM1070), Terminate the process as it is.

[Tables referenced in the start-up prize-winning effect determination process]
FIG. 9-12 is a specific example of a table referred to in the start winning effect determination process in the first embodiment. FIG. 9-12 is an example of a zone effect execution/non-execution determination table referred to when determining whether or not to execute a zone effect in step S04TM1040.

<Table for deciding whether or not to execute zone effects>
FIG. 9-12 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the zone effect. As shown in FIGS. 9-12, determination values are assigned so that the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the zone effect differs according to the display result specified by the symbol specifying command.

When the display result is "miss", it is decided not to execute the zone effect at a rate of 98%, and to execute the zone effect at a rate of 2%.

When the display result is "big hit", it is decided not to execute the zone performance at a rate of 80%, and to execute the zone performance at a rate of 20%.

[Zone production]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a zone effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended) based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. This zone effect indicates that the display result of the variable display, which is the object of judgment at the time of starting winning, is a "jackpot" by using the background image of the ornamental pattern displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. It is a kind of advance notice effect.

In the zone effect, a special background image different from the normal background image is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern on the entire screen of the image display device 5, so that the display result is a "big hit" in the variable display that is subject to notice. suggest that In this example, the special background image is an image representing a landscape of a volcano including the characters "POWERFUL ZONE".

<Production example of zone production>
FIGS. 9-13 are explanatory diagrams showing effects modes of various effects when zone effects are executed.

In this example, the first pending memory associated with the start winning that occurred when the first pending memory number is 3 (the first pending memory in which the fourth variable display is executed among the variable displays whose execution is pending) In the object start winning effect determination process (Fig. 9-11), it is decided to execute the zone effect, the zone prefetch counter is set, and the first reserved storage number is 4. Based on this, zone prefetch is performed. Assume that 4 is set as the value of the counter.

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 which receives the symbol confirmation designation command selects the normal background image BI1 as the background image of the decorative symbol. is displayed, the final combination of decoration symbols ("246" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("246" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays four of the first suspension displays PD1 in the normal mode in the first suspension display area PD1E, and corresponds to the fact that the active display area ACE is not currently being subjected to variable display. and the active display AC is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the image display device In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of 5, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the zone effect and displays the special background image BI2 as the background image of the decoration pattern.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 newly displays the normal mode active display AC corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area ACE based on the fact that the first reserved memory number has become 3. , the first suspension display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first suspension display area PD1E is shifted one by one toward the active display area ACE.

[Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation]
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (jackpot, or hit, jackpot type in the case of a big hit, etc.), and the fluctuation time of the special symbol and Variation display of special symbols is executed based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command specifying the effect content (reach, pseudo-run, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, and , It is possible to specify the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the contents of the production (reach and pseudo consecutive etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 9-14 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of variation in the first embodiment. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-14 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 9-14.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is "non-reach out" (step S04TM1110).

When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is "non-reach out" (step S04TM1110: YES), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM1150.

If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is not "non-reach out" (step S04TM1110: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second conversation preview effect, which will be described later, is executed and the mode of effect, is set to the second conversation preview. It is determined based on the table (see FIG. 9-15 (1)) for determining the presence or absence of performance and the mode of performance (step S04TM1120).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the second conversation preview effect (step S04TM1130).

If it is decided to execute the second conversation preview effect (step S04TM1130: YES), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM1150.

If it is decided not to execute the second conversation advance notice effect (step S04TM1130: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the first conversation notice effect is executed or not. (step S04TM1140).

Step S04TM1110: YES, step S04TM1130: YES, or after the process of step S04TM1140, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the zone effect is being executed (step S04TM1150).

If the zone effect is being executed (step S04TM1150: YES), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM1170.

If the zone effect is not being executed (step S04TM1150: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the normal background chance-up effect is to be executed, and the normal background chance-up effect is to be executed. -15 (3)) (step S04TM1160).

Step S04TM1150: YES, or after the processing of step S04TM1160, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with super reach (that is, "super reach out", "super reach A It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot” or a “super reach B jackpot” (step S04TM1170).

When the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is not a variation pattern with super reach (step S04TM1170: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with super reach (step S04TM1170: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a battle conversation announcement effect described later (step S04TM1180). , the process ends.

[Tables referenced in the process of determining the effect at the start of fluctuation]
FIGS. 9-15(1) to 9-15(3) are specific examples of tables referred to in the variation start effect determination process in the first embodiment. FIG. 9-15(1) is an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the second conversation preview effect and effect mode, which is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the second conversation preview effect and the effect mode in step S04TM1120. FIG. 9-15(2) is an example of a determination table for determining whether or not to execute the first conversation preview effect, which is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the first conversation preview effect in step S04TM1140. FIG. 9-15(3) is an example of a normal background chance-up effect execution/non-execution determination table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the normal background chance-up effect in step S04TM1160.

<Whether or not to execute the second conversation advance notice effect and effect mode determination table>
FIG. 9-15(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presence/absence of execution of the second conversation advance notice effect and the effect mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), in this embodiment, the execution ratio and presentation mode (this In the example, the judgment values are assigned so that the selection ratios of the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode are different.

determining not to execute the second conversation announcement effect at a rate of 85% when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"); It is decided to execute the second conversation notice effect of the first mode at a rate of 10%, decide to execute the second conversation notice effect of the second mode at a rate of 3%, and the second conversation notice effect at a rate of 2%. It is decided to execute the second conversation forewarning effect of three modes.

When the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), 65% of the time, it is decided not to execute the second conversation announcement effect, It is decided to execute the second conversation notice effect of the first mode at a rate of 5%, decide to execute the second conversation notice effect of the second mode at a rate of 10%, and execute the second conversation notice effect of the second mode at a rate of 20%. It is decided to execute the second conversation forewarning effect of three modes.

In this way, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the second conversational advance notice effect is executed than when the second conversational notice effect is not executed. In addition, when the second conversation announcement effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high because of the relationship of the first mode<second mode<third mode.

<Decision table for execution/non-execution of the first conversation announcement effect>
FIG. 9-15(2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the first conversational announcement effect. As shown in FIG. 9-15(2), in this embodiment, the judgment values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the first conversation announcement effect is different.

It is decided not to execute the first conversation advance notice effect at a rate of 80%, and to execute the first conversation notice effect at a rate of 20%.

In this way, whether or not the first conversation notice effect is executed is not determined according to whether the display result is "loss" or "big hit", but when the variation pattern is not "non-reach failure". Since it is executable, when the first conversation announcement effect is executed, the variation pattern denies "non-reach loss", that is, the variation pattern is a variation pattern equal to or higher than the normal reach. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the first conversational advance notice effect is executed than when the first conversational notice effect is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and whether or not the first conversational advance notice effect is executed may not suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit.

<Normal background chance-up performance execution/non-execution determination table>
FIG. 9-15(3) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the normal background chance-up effect. As shown in FIG. 9-15 (3), in this embodiment, the execution ratio of the normal background chance-up effect is determined to be different depending on whether the display result is "loss" or "big hit". value is assigned.

When the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), it is decided not to execute the normal background chance-up effect at a rate of 98%, It is decided to execute the normal background chance-up effect at a rate of 2%.

When the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the normal background chance-up effect at a rate of 80%, It is decided to execute the normal background chance-up effect at a rate of 20%.

Thus, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the normal background chance-up effect is executed than when the normal background chance-up effect is not executed.

[1st conversation preview effect]
In this embodiment, when the variation pattern is not a "non-reach loss" variation pattern (that is, the variation pattern is "normal reach loss", "super reach loss", "normal reach big hit", "super reach A big hit", or " When it is either "super reach B jackpot"), the first conversation announcement effect can be executed using the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

This first conversation preview effect is an image of the conversation between the first ally character CA1 and the second ally character CA2 on the screen of the image display device 5 (video of each character speaking, contents of the lines spoken by each character). This is a kind of notice performance during fluctuation, in which a dialogue telop corresponding to the character is displayed and a dialogue voice corresponding to the contents of the dialogue spoken by each character on the screen of the image display device 5 is reproduced and outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Hereinafter, the first ally character CA1 will be referred to as "first ally CA1," "first ally character CA1," and "first character CA1," as appropriate. Also, hereinafter, the second ally character CA2 will be appropriately referred to as "second ally CA2", "second ally character CA2", and "second character CA2".

In this embodiment, the dialogue telop corresponding to the first character CA1 is referred to as "first dialogue telop", and the dialogue audio corresponding to the first character CA1 is referred to as "first dialogue audio". Also, the dialogue telop corresponding to the second character CA2 is referred to as "second dialogue telop", and the dialogue audio corresponding to the second character CA2 is referred to as "second dialogue audio".

<Conversation control>
(First conversation control)
In this embodiment, in the first conversation preview effect, the image display device 5 displays an image in which the first character CA1 speaks and a first dialogue telop corresponding to the speech spoken by the first character CA1. , a series of effect control in which the first line voice corresponding to the line spoken by the first character CA1 is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is referred to as "first conversation control".

In the first conversation preview effect, the image display device 5 displays an image in which the first character CA1 performs an action other than the speaking action (for example, an action of appearing, an action of listening to another character speak, etc.). The control is referred to as the "first non-speech control".

(Second conversation control)
In addition, in the first conversation preview effect, the video of the second character CA2 speaking and the second dialogue telop corresponding to the speech spoken by the second character CA2 are displayed on the image display device 5. A series of effect control in which the second dialogue sound corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the character CA2 is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is referred to as "second dialogue control".

In the first conversation preview effect, the image display device 5 displays an image in which the second character CA2 performs an action other than the speaking action (for example, an action of appearing, an action of listening to another character speak, etc.). The control is referred to as the "second non-speech control".

<Display area of dialogue telop of the first conversation preview effect>
In the present embodiment, the display area of the first dialogue telop in the first dialogue control is the area at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and the display area of the second dialogue telop in the second dialogue control is also the display of the first dialogue telop. It is the lower area of the screen of the image display device 5 similar to the area. The display area of the first dialogue telop in the first dialogue control and the display area of the second dialogue telop in the second dialogue control are referred to as "common dialogue telop display area".

In this way, since the display area for the first dialogue telop and the display area for the second dialogue telop are set in a common area, it is necessary to secure two display areas for the dialogue telop corresponding to each character. and does not interfere with the visibility of other presentations (background images, decorative designs, etc.). .

<Production example of the first conversation preview production>
FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18 are explanatory diagrams showing effects modes of various effects when the first conversation preview effect is executed. FIG. 9-16 is a time chart showing execution timings of various effects when the first conversation announcement effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-16: T1), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the symbol confirmation designation command, In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the final combination of decorative symbols ("246" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("246" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal background image BI1 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays one first suspension display PD1 in the normal mode in the first suspension display area PD1E, and corresponds to the fact that the active display area ACE is not currently being displayed with a variable display. is not displaying the active display AC.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-16: T2), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first suspension display PD1 in the normal mode, which has been displayed in the first suspension display area PD1E, to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first suspension storage number has become 0. While shifting by one, active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed in the active display area ACE.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (3), at the timing (FIG. 9-16: T3) after a predetermined second (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, The effect control CPU 120 starts the first conversation announcement effect, and makes the first character CA1 appear from the right part of the screen of the image display device 5 to perform the first non-conversation control.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17(4), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the first conversation preview effect, and displays the first character CA1 from the right part of the screen of the image display device 5 to the center part of the screen. is moved, the first character CA1 for performing the first conversation control is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 .

At this time, in the first conversation control, an image in which the first character CA1 speaks (in this example, an image in which the first character CA1 smiles and moves its mouth) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , the first line telop TL1 (in this example, the characters "Nana-chan!") corresponding to the line spoken by the first character CA1 ("Nana-chan!" While being displayed in the display area TLE, the first line voice corresponding to the line spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, the voice of "Nana-chan!") is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the first conversation preview effect, and displays the first conversation control effect in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. With the character CA1 displayed, a second character CA2 for performing second non-conversation control appears from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first conversation preview effect, and the second character CA2 is displayed from the left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to the center portion of the screen. is moved, the second character CA2 for the second conversation control is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the first character CA1 for the first non-conversation control is displayed.

At this time, in the second conversation control, an image in which the second character CA2 speaks (in this example, an image in which the second character CA2 smiles and moves its mouth) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , the second dialogue telop TL2 (in this example, the characters "Hey! Yume-chan!") corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, "Hey! Yume-chan!") is displayed as an image. While being displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE of the device 5, the second dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, the voice of "Hey! Yume-chan!") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is played back from the

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the first conversation preview effect, and displays the first conversation control effect in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The character CA1 is displayed, and the second character CA2 for performing the second non-conversation control is displayed.

At this time, in the first conversation control, an image in which the first character CA1 speaks (in this example, an image in which the first character CA1 smiles and moves its mouth) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , the first line telop TL1 (in this example, "Where is Jam-chan?") corresponding to the line spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, "Where is Jam-chan?") is While being displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE of the image display device 5, the first dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, the voice of "Jam-chan, where are you?") is output from the speaker. It is reproduced and output from 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (8), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the first conversation preview effect, and displays the second conversation control effect in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The character CA2 is displayed, and the first character CA1 for performing the first non-conversation control is displayed.

At this time, in the second conversation control, an image in which the second character CA2 speaks (in this example, an image in which the second character CA2 points to the left side of the screen and moves its mouth with a smile) is displayed on the image display device 5. A second dialogue telop TL2 (in this example, "I was there!") displayed in the center of the screen and corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, "I was over there!") ) is displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE of the image display device 5, and the second dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, the voice of "I was over there!") is output from the speaker. It is reproduced and output from 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-18 (9), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the first conversation preview effect, and displays the first conversation control effect in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The character CA1 is displayed, and the second character CA2 for performing the second non-conversation control is displayed.

At this time, in the first conversation control, an image in which the first character CA1 speaks (in this example, an image in which the first character CA1 smiles and moves its mouth) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , the first line telop TL1 (in this example, "Thank you! Let's go together!") corresponding to the line spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, "Thank you! Let's go together!") is While being displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE of the image display device 5, the first dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, the voice of "Thank you! Let's go together!") is output from the speaker. It is reproduced and output from 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-18 (10), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the first conversation preview effect, and displays the second conversation control effect in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The character CA2 is displayed, and the first character CA1 for performing the first non-conversation control is displayed.

At this time, in the second conversation control, an image in which the second character CA2 speaks (in this example, an image in which the second character CA2 smiles and moves its mouth) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , the second line telop TL2 (in this example, the characters "Let's go!") corresponding to the line spoken by the second character CA2 ("Let's go!" in this example) is the common line telop of the image display device 5. While being displayed in the display area TLE, a second line voice corresponding to the lines spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, the voice of "Let's go!") is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-18 (11), at the timing (FIG. 9-16: T4) at which the first conversation advance notice effect should end, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first conversation notice effect, and the image The first character CA1 and the second character CA2 are erased from the central portion of the screen of the display device 5. - 特許庁

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first conversation preview effect is executed, the first conversation control by the first character CA1 displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 is executed three times in total, and the image is displayed. The second conversation control by the second character CA2 displayed at the center of the screen of the device 5 is executed a total of three times.

However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when the first conversation preview effect is executed, the first conversation control by the first character CA1 displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 is executed a total of three times, A configuration different from the configuration in which the second conversation control by the second character CA2 displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 is executed three times in total may be employed.

For example, when the first conversation preview effect is executed, the first character CA1 displayed in a region (upper portion of the screen) different from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 may execute the first conversation control. The second character CA2 displayed in a region (lower portion of the screen) different from the central portion of the screen of the display device 5 may execute the second conversation control. Further, in the first conversation announcement effect, the first conversation control may be executed less than three times (once, two times) or more than three times (four times, five times). good too. Further, in the first conversation announcement effect, the second conversation control may be executed less than three times (once, two times) or more than three times (four times, five times). good too.

In the present embodiment, the timing (FIG. 9-16: T4) at which the first conversation announcement effect should end is the timing (FIG. 9-16: T5) at which the reach state in the variation pattern should be established, or the timing (FIG. 9-16: T5) in which the variation pattern 9-16: T6). However, it is not limited to such a form, and the timing at which the first conversational notice effect should be ended may be a timing after the timing at which the ready-to-reach state in the variation pattern should be established, and develop into super-reach in the variation pattern. The timing may be later than the timing at which it should be performed.

[Second conversation preview effect]
In this embodiment, when the variation pattern is not a "non-reach loss" variation pattern (that is, the variation pattern is "normal reach loss", "super reach loss", "normal reach big hit", "super reach A big hit", or " When it is either "super reach B jackpot"), the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L, 8R can be used to execute the second conversational announcement effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot.

Similar to the first conversation preview effect, the second conversation preview effect is a video of the conversation between the first teammate character CA1 and the second teammate character CA2 on the screen of the image display device 5 (video of each character speaking, The dialogue telop corresponding to the contents of the lines spoken by each character is displayed, and the dialogue sound corresponding to the contents of the lines spoken by each character on the screen of the image display device 5 is reproduced and output from speakers 8L and 8R. It is a kind of notice production during fluctuation.

In this embodiment, in the second conversation preview effect, the dialogue telop includes the contents (characters) of the dialogue spoken by each character, and an icon corresponding to the character speaking the dialogue. In this example, the first dialogue telop includes a first icon corresponding to the first character CA1, and the second dialogue telop includes a second icon corresponding to the second character CA2.

<Display area of dialogue telop of the second conversation preview effect>
In the present embodiment, the display area of the first dialogue telop in the first dialogue control is the area at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and the display area of the second dialogue telop in the second dialogue control is the display of the first dialogue telop. The upper area of the screen of the image display device 5 is different from the area. The display area of the first dialogue telop in the first conversation control is called "first dialogue telop display area", and the display area of the second dialogue telop in the second dialogue control is called "second dialogue telop display area".

In this way, the display area for the first dialogue telop and the display area for the second dialogue telop are set in different areas, so that the dialogue telop corresponding to each character becomes clear, and the dialogue using the dialogue telop is displayed. The production effect of the CU production can be improved.

<Conversation control>
In the present embodiment, as in the first conversation preview effect, the first conversation control and the first non-conversation control can be executed with respect to the first character CA1, and the second conversation control and , is capable of executing the second non-conversational control.

<Production mode of the second conversation preview production>
In this embodiment, a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode are provided as the rendering modes of the second conversation preview rendering. In the present embodiment, when the second conversation control of the second character CA2 is executed for the second time, the second conversation control is performed in correspondence with the lines spoken by the second character CA2 and the lines spoken by the second character CA2. The presentation modes of the second dialogue telop TL2 and the second dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the second character CA2 are made different. In this second conversation advance notice effect, the effect of changing the effect mode of the second conversation control is a dialogue chance-up effect (hereinafter referred to as a "line CU effect" as appropriate).

(First aspect)
In the second conversation preview effect of the first mode, when the second conversation control of the second character CA2 is executed for the second time, it corresponds to the lines spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, "So so so"). The blue second-line telop TL2A (in this example, the second-line telop containing the characters "OK" and the blue second icon) is displayed in the second-line telop display area TLE2 of the image display device 5, A second line voice corresponding to the lines spoken by the two characters CA2 (in this example, the voice of "Something okay") is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second aspect)
In the second conversation preview effect of the second aspect, when the second conversation control of the second character CA2 is executed for the second time, the lines spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, "It's a chance development!! ”) corresponding to the second dialogue telop TL2B (in this example, a dialogue telop containing characters “It’s a chance development!!” and a red second icon) is displayed in the second dialogue telop display area of the image display device 5. While being displayed on TLE2, a second line voice corresponding to the lines spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, the voice of "It's a chance development!") is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third aspect)
In the second conversation preview effect of the third aspect, when the second conversation control of the second character CA2 is executed for the second time, the lines spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, "This is an exciting development!! ”) corresponding to the second speech telop display area of the image display device 5 (in this example, the second speech telop TL2C including the characters “It’s an exciting development!!” and the second gold icon). While being displayed on TLE2, a second speech voice corresponding to the speech spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, the voice of "It's an exciting development!") is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Production example of the second conversation preview production>
FIGS. 9-20 and 9-21 are explanatory diagrams showing effects modes of various effects when the second conversation preview effect is executed. FIGS. 9-19 are time charts showing execution timings of various effects when the second conversation announcement effect is executed. In this example, it is assumed that execution of the second conversation announcement effect of the third mode is determined in the process of determining the effect at the time of fluctuation start.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-19: T1), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the symbol confirmation designation command, In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the final combination of decorative symbols ("246" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("246" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal background image BI1 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays one first suspension display PD1 in the normal mode in the first suspension display area PD1E, and corresponds to the fact that the active display area ACE is not currently being displayed with a variable display. is not displaying the active display AC.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-19: T2), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first suspension display PD1 in the normal mode, which has been displayed in the first suspension display area PD1E, to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first suspension storage number has become 0. While shifting by one, active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed in the active display area ACE.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (3), at the timing (FIG. 9-19: T3) after a predetermined second (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, The effect control CPU 120 starts the second conversation preview effect, and causes the first character CA1 to perform the first non-conversation control to appear from the right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20(4), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the second conversation preview effect, and displays the first character CA1 from the right part of the screen of the image display device 5 to the center part of the screen. is moved, the first character CA1 for performing the first conversation control is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 .

At this time, in the first conversation control, an image in which the first character CA1 speaks (in this example, an image in which the first character CA1 smiles and moves its mouth) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , the first dialogue telop TL1 (in this example, the characters "Nana-chan!" and the first icon) corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the first character CA1 ("Nana-chan!" is displayed in the first line telop display area TLE1, and the first line voice corresponding to the lines spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, the voice of "Nana-chan!") is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the second conversation preview effect, and displays the first conversation control effect in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. With the character CA1 displayed, a second character CA2 for performing second non-conversation control appears from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20(6), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the second conversation preview effect, and the second character CA2 is displayed from the left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to the center portion of the screen. is moved, the second character CA2 for the second conversation control is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the first character CA1 for the first non-conversation control is displayed.

At this time, in the second conversation control, an image in which the second character CA2 speaks (in this example, an image in which the second character CA2 smiles and moves its mouth) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , a second dialogue telop TL2 (in this example, “Hey! ) is displayed in the second dialogue telop display area TLE2 of the image display device 5, and the second dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, the voice of "Hey! Yume-chan!"). are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the second conversation preview effect, and displays the first conversation control effect in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The character CA1 is displayed, and the second character CA2 for performing the second non-conversation control is displayed.

At this time, in the first conversation control, an image in which the first character CA1 speaks (in this example, an image in which the first character CA1 smiles and moves its mouth) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , the first dialogue telop TL1 (in this example, "What will happen from here?") corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, "What will happen from here?"). and first icon) are displayed in the first dialogue telop display area TLE1 of the image display device 5, and the first dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, "What will happen from here? Kana?”) is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (8), the effect control CPU 120 executes the third mode of the second conversation preview effect, and displays the second conversation control effect in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The second character CA2 is displayed, and the first character CA1 for performing the first non-conversation control is displayed.

At this time, in the second conversation control, an image in which the second character CA2 speaks (in this example, an image in which the second character CA2 smiles and moves its mouth) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , The golden second dialogue telop TL2C (in this example, "It's a crazy development!!") corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the second character CA2 (in this example, "It's a crazy development!") A gold second icon) is displayed in the second dialogue telop display area TLE2 of the image display device 5, and a second dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the second character CA2 !!”) are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-21(9), at the timing (FIG. 9-19: T4) at which the second conversation notice effect should end, the effect control CPU 120 ends the second conversation notice effect, and the image The first character CA1 and the second character CA2 are erased from the central portion of the screen of the display device 5. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the timing (FIG. 9-19: T4) at which the second conversation announcement effect should end is the timing (FIG. 9-19: T5) at which the reach state in the variation pattern should be established, or 9-19: T6). However, not limited to such a form, the timing at which the third conversation notice effect should be ended may be a timing after the timing at which the ready-to-reach state in the variation pattern should be established, and develop into super-reach in the variation pattern. The timing may be later than the timing at which it should be performed.

[Battle Conversation Preview]
In this embodiment, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach (that is, when the variation pattern is either "super reach miss", "super reach A jackpot", or "super reach B jackpot") In addition, it is possible to execute a battle conversation announcement effect using the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

This battle conversation preview effect is an image of the conversation between the first ally character CA1 and the enemy character CB on the screen of the image display device 5 (an image of each character speaking, and a dialogue corresponding to the content of the words spoken by each character). This is a kind of forewarning effect during fluctuation, in which a speech telop is displayed and speech sounds corresponding to the contents of the speech spoken by each character on the screen of the image display device 5 are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Hereinafter, the enemy character CB will be referred to as "enemy CB" and "enemy character CB" as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, as in the first conversation preview effect, the dialogue telop corresponding to the first character CA1 is referred to as "first dialogue telop", and the dialogue audio corresponding to the first character CA1 is referred to as "first dialogue audio". called. Also, the dialogue telop corresponding to the enemy character CB is called "third dialogue telop", and the dialogue sound corresponding to the enemy character CB is called "third dialogue sound".

<Conversation control>
(First conversation control)
In the present embodiment, in the battle conversation preview effect, as in the first conversation preview effect, the video of the first character CA1 speaking and the first dialogue telop are displayed on the image display device 5, and the first dialogue is displayed. A series of effect control in which the voice is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is called "first conversation control". The same applies to the "first non-conversation control".

(Third conversation control)
In addition, in the battle conversation preview effect, an image in which the enemy character CB speaks and a third speech telop corresponding to the speech spoken by the enemy character CB are displayed on the image display device 5, and the enemy character CB speaks. A series of effect control in which the third speech sound corresponding to the speech is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is called "third conversation control".

In the battle conversation preview effect, the effect control in which the image display device 5 performs an action other than the speaking action of the enemy character CB (for example, an action of listening to another character speak) is referred to as the "third "Non-conversational control".

<Display area of dialogue telop for battle conversation preview>
In this embodiment, the display area of the first dialogue telop in the first conversation control is the lower area of the screen of the image display device 5, and the display area of the third dialogue telop in the third dialogue control is also the display of the first dialogue telop. It is the lower area of the screen of the image display device 5 similar to the area. The display area for the first dialogue telop in the first dialogue control and the display area for the third dialogue telop in the third dialogue control are referred to as "common dialogue telop display areas". That is, it is the same as the common dialogue telop display area of the first conversation preview effect.

Since the display area for the first dialogue telop and the display area for the third dialogue telop are set in a common area in this way, it is necessary to secure two display areas for the dialogue telop corresponding to each character. It does not interfere with the visibility of other effects (battle effects, etc.).

<Production example of battle conversation preview production>
FIG. 9-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of various effects when the battle conversation announcement effect is executed. FIG. 9-22 is a time chart showing execution timings of various effects when the battle conversation announcement effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (1), at the timing (FIG. 9-22: T2) to develop super reach in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 starts the battle effect, and the image display device 5 , a battle start image including the first character CA1, the enemy character CB, and the characters "VS" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), at the timing (FIG. 9-22: T3) at which the battle conversation announcement effect in the battle effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 starts the battle conversation announcement effect, The left part of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first character CA1 that performs the first conversation control, and the right part of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the enemy character CB that performs the third non-conversation control.

At this time, in the first conversation control, an image of the first character CA1 speaking (in this example, an image of the first character CA1 talking to the enemy character CB) is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. A first line telop TL1 (in this example, "I will not lose!") corresponding to the line spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, "I will not lose!") is displayed as an image. While being displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE of the device 5, the first dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, the voice of "I won't lose!") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Playback output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the battle conversation announcement effect, and displays the first character for performing the first non-conversation control on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. CA1 is displayed, and an enemy character CB, which performs the third conversation control, is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

At this time, in the third conversation control, an image of the enemy character CB speaking (in this example, an image of the enemy character CB speaking to the first character CA1) is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. Then, the image display device 5 displays the third dialogue telop TL3 (in this example, the characters "Come on!") corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the enemy character CB (in this example, "Come on!"). is displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE, and the third dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the enemy character CB (in this example, the voice of "Call me!") is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23(4), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the battle conversation announcement effect, and displays the first character CA1 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to perform the first conversation control. is displayed, and the enemy character CB for which the third non-conversation control is to be performed is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 .

At this time, in the first conversation control, an image in which the first character CA1 speaks (in this example, an image in which the first character CA1 speaks while attacking the enemy character CB) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The first line telop TL1 (in this example, the characters "Kurae!") corresponding to the line spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, "Kurae!") is displayed as an image. While being displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE of the display device 5, the first dialogue voice corresponding to the dialogue spoken by the first character CA1 (in this example, the voice of "Kurae!") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Playback output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (5), at the timing (FIG. 9-22: T4) at which the operation prompting display in the variation pattern should be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle conversation announcement effect, An operation prompting display BT is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B in this example).

In this example, the operation prompting display BT includes the characters "Press!!" It is formed by adding a time bar indicating the validity period. Here, since the first character CA1 and the enemy character CB are displayed in the background of the operation prompting display BT, the player can operate the operation unit to allow the first character CA1 to win against the enemy character CB. Operate the operation part with anticipation.

Next, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "super reach A jackpot", as shown in FIG. 9-23 (6A), when the player operates the operating unit, the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning effect. . In the victory effect, the first character CA1 is displayed in the center of the screen, the characters "Victory" are displayed in the upper left part of the screen, and a combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is displayed in the upper right part of the screen (Fig. 9). -33(11)).

In addition, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "super reach loss" or "super reach B jackpot", as shown in FIG. The CPU 120 executes a defeat effect. In the defeat effect, the enemy character CB is displayed in the center of the screen, the characters "defeat" are displayed in the upper left part of the screen, and a combination of decorative patterns indicating failure is displayed in the upper right part of the screen (Fig. 9- 45(2)).

[Normal background chance up effect]
In this embodiment, when the normal background image BI1 is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, the normal background chance-up effect can be executed. Hereinafter, the normal background chance-up effect will be referred to as "normal background CU effect", "background CU effect", "CU effect", etc. as appropriate.

This background CU effect is a kind of in-varying notice effect suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high by displaying a chance-up image (in this example, a star-shaped object) in the normal background image BI1.

In the present embodiment, the chance-up image displayed in the background CU effect is an image that is smaller and less visible than other objects (for example, mountains, sky, sun, etc.) included in the normal background image BI1, This is an image that is smaller and less visible than other objects (for example, decorative designs, pending display, active display, etc.) that are not included in the normal background image BI1.

In the above-described embodiment, the chance-up image is not displayed when the background CU effect is not executed, and the chance-up image is displayed when the background CU effect is executed. The chance-up image is always displayed from the time the background CU performance is not executed, and the mode of the chance-up image may be changed when the background CU performance is executed. For example, the chance-up image (white star-shaped object) is always displayed on the normal background image BI1 from the time the background CU effect is not executed, and when the background CU effect is executed, the chance-up image mode is changed. Transform into a red star-shaped object.

<Production example of normal background chance up production>
FIG. 9-24 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of various effects when the background CU effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "246") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("246" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal background image BI1 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays one first suspension display PD1 in the normal mode in the first suspension display area PD1E, and corresponds to the fact that the active display area ACE is not currently being displayed with a variable display. is not displaying the active display AC.

From this state, the state shifts to either state of FIG. 9-24 (2A) or (2B) depending on whether or not the background CU effect is executed. When the background CU effect is not executed, the process shifts to FIG. 9-24 (2A), and when the background CU effect is not executed, the process shifts to FIG. 9-24 (2B).

(When the background CU effect is not executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-24 (2A), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first suspension display PD1 in the normal mode, which has been displayed in the first suspension display area PD1E, to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first suspension storage number has become 0. While shifting by one, active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed in the active display area ACE.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the background CU effect and does not display the chance up image CU on the normal background image BI1.

(When background CU effect is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-24 (2B), the effect control CPU 120 executes the background CU effect to display the chance up image CU on the normal background image BI1. In FIG. 9-24 (2B), other effect images that are not related to the background CU effect are the same as those in FIG. 9-24 (2A) described above, so description thereof is omitted.

[Second embodiment]
In the second embodiment, when a pending memory to reach the relief time reduction occurs, the arrival suspension effect (Fig. 9-29 , FIGS. 9-30 and 9-31) can be executed. In addition, when the pending memory does not reach the relief time reduction and the determination result of the pending memory is "big hit", it is possible to hold the big hit before the variable display corresponding to the pending memory is executed. It is possible to execute a fixed pending effect (see FIGS. 9-29, 9-32, and 9-33) that is notified using a display.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the newly generated pending storage is executed, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0, that is, if the relief time reduction is reached, the variable corresponding to this pending storage Even if the display is not executed (execution is suspended), it has not yet reached the relief time reduction, but in the future (when the variable display is actually executed), it will be a relief time reduction Since it is a suspended memory that is scheduled to arrive, this suspended memory is appropriately classified as ``a suspended memory that will reach a short relief time'', a ``a suspended memory that will reach a short relief time'', and a ``a suspended memory that will reach a short relief time in the future''. , ``Relief time-saving arrival pending memory'', ``Relief time-saving arrival pending memory'', ``Relief time-saving arrival pending memory'', ``Relief time-saving arrival fluctuation'', ``Relief time-saving arrival fluctuation display'', etc.

(A) The display result of the pending memory is determined to be a "jackpot", and the variable display corresponding to the pending memory is executed even when the pending memory that reaches the relief time is generated, and the big hit is achieved. When it occurs, or (B) the display result of the reserved memory in which the variable display is executed before the reserved memory is determined as a "big hit", the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory determined as the big hit is executed, and the big hit is achieved. occurs, the reserved memory does not actually reach the relief time.

[Production determination process at the time of start winning]
FIG. 9-25 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the time of start winning in this embodiment. The effect control CP 120 executes the start winning time effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Description of the same processing as in FIGS. 9-11 will be omitted.

After the processing of step S04TM1010, the effect control CPU 120 executes a second special determination process (see FIGS. 9-26 and 9-37) described later (step S04TM2010), and an arrival pending effect execution flag described later, or It is determined whether or not any of the fixed pending effect execution flags is set (step S04TM2020).

If either the arrival pending effect execution flag or the fixed pending effect execution flag is set (step S04TM2020: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If neither the arrival pending effect execution flag nor the fixed pending effect execution flag is set (step S04TM2020: NO), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM1020.

[2nd A embodiment]
In the 2A embodiment of the second embodiment, when the start winning occurs when the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is less than a predetermined number of times, the judgment result of the holding storage is "big hit" Sometimes, it is possible to limit the execution of the fixed pending effect for the relevant pending memory.

[Second Special Judgment Processing]
FIG. 9-26 is a flow chart showing the second special determination process in the 2A embodiment. The effect control CP 120 executes the second special determination process in the start winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-25.

First, in the second special determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result of any one of the reserved memories including the reserved memory is a "big hit" (S04TM2110).

If the display result of any one of the reserved memories including the reserved memory is "big hit" (S04TM2110: YES), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2132.

When any of the display results of the pending memory including the pending memory is "missing" (S04TM2110: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 4 or less. (Step S04TM2120).

When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not less than 4 (step S04TM2120: NO), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2132.

When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 4 or less (step S04TM2120: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the arrival suspension effect is executed or not. -27 (1)) (step S04TM2130).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the arrival suspension effect (step S04TM2140).

If it is determined not to execute the arrival pending effect (step S04TM2140: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2134.

If it is determined to execute the arrival suspension effect (step S04TM2140: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the arrival suspension look-ahead counter (step S04TM2150), sets the arrival suspension effect execution flag (step S04TM2160), the process proceeds to step 04TM2170.

After the process of step S04TM2110: YES or step S04TM2120: NO, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the arrival suspension effect (step S04TM2132), and advances the process to step S04TM2134.

Step S04TM2132 or step S04TM2140: After the process of NO, the effect control CPU 120 sets an arrival pending effect limit flag (step S04TM2134), and advances the process to step S04TM2170.

After the process of step S04TM2160 or step S04TM2134, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result of the pending memory is "big hit" (step S04TM2170).

If the display result of the pending memory is "miss" (step S04TM2170: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2202.

When the display result of the pending memory is "big hit" (step S04TM2170: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 5 or more (S04TM2190).

When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 5 or more (S04TM2190: NO), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2202.

When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 5 or more (S04TM2190: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the fixed pending effect is executed or not. 27 (2)) (step S04TM2200).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2210).

If it is determined not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2210: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2204.

When it is determined to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2210: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the fixed pending effect reading counter (step S04TM2220), sets the fixed pending effect execution flag (step S04TM2230), the process ends.

After step S04TM2170: NO or step S04TM2190: NO, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2202), and advances the process to step S04TM2204.

Step S04TM2202 or step S04TM2210: After the process of NO, the effect control CPU 120 sets a fixed pending effect limit flag (step S04TM2204), and ends the process as it is.

In this embodiment, the reachable pending effect execution flag is a kind of flag that is set based on the determination that the reachable pending effect is to be executed. Since the arrival suspension effect execution flag is set, the process of steps S04TM1020 to S04TM1070 is skipped based on the determination of step S04TM2020: YES, so it is decided to execute the arrival suspension effect. In this state, it is possible to limit the decision to execute the zone effect redundantly corresponding to the first reserved storage. This reachable pending effect execution flag is erased when the variable display that is the subject of notice when the reachable pending effect execution flag is set ends.

In this embodiment, the reachable suspension effect limit flag is a kind of flag that is set based on the determination that the reachable suspension effect is not executed. The arrival suspension effect limit flag is erased when the variable display that is the subject of notice when the arrival suspension effect limit flag is set ends.

In this embodiment, the fixed pending effect execution flag is a kind of flag that is set based on the determination that the fixed pending effect is to be executed. Since the determination of step S04TM2020: YES is made because the fixed pending effect execution flag is set, the processing of steps S04TM1020 to S04TM1070 is skipped, so it is decided to execute the fixed pending effect. In this state, it is possible to limit the decision to execute the zone effect redundantly corresponding to the first reserved storage. This fixed pending performance execution flag is erased when the big win game state controlled after the end of the variable display to be notified when the fixed pending performance execution flag is set is completed.

In this embodiment, the fixed pending effect limit flag is a kind of flag that is set based on the determination that the fixed pending effect is not executed. This fixed pending effect limit flag is erased when the variable display for which the notice is given when the fixed fixed effect limit flag is set is finished.

[Tables referenced in the second special determination process]
FIGS. 9-27 (1) and (2) are specific examples of tables referred to in the second special determination process in the second embodiment. FIG. 9-27(1) is an example of an execution/non-execution determination table for an arrival/suspension effect referred to when determining whether or not an arrival/suspension effect is to be executed in step S04TM2130. FIG. 9-27(2) is an example of a fixed pending effect execution/non-execution determination table referred to when determining whether or not to execute a fixed pending effect in step S04TM2200.

<Execution/non-execution determination table for arrival hold effect>
FIG. 9-27(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table of the arrival suspension effect. As shown in FIG. 9-27 (1), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the presence or absence of execution of the arrival suspension effect differs depending on which value of the relief time reduction number counter is. . In this example, the case where the arrival pending effect is not executed is called “no execution” (that is, the execution ratio: 0%), and the case where the arrival pending effect is executed is called “executed” (that is, the execution ratio: 100% ).

In this embodiment, the number of times until the variable display of the pending memory that is the determination target of the second special determination process is executed (the variable display being executed when the start winning corresponding to the pending memory occurs) contains) matches the value of the number of pending stores. If the number of reserved memories is N (N=1 to 4) when the starting prize corresponding to the reserved memory is generated, the number of times until the variable display of the reserved memory is executed is N times.

Therefore, as shown in the following (1) and (2), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "N", whether or not the relief time reduction is reached depends on the value of the number of pending memories .

(1) When the value of the number of reserved memories is "N" Since the number of times until the variable display of the reserved memory is executed is N times, when the variable display of the reserved memory is executed, the relief time is shortened. The value of the number counter becomes "0". In other words, the variable display of the pending memory becomes the relief time-saving arrival variation.

(2) When the value of the number of reserved memories is not "N" Since the number of times until the variable display of the reserved memory is executed is N times, when the variable display of the reserved memory is executed, the number of times of relief time reduction The value of the counter becomes a value other than "0". In other words, the variable display of the pending memory does not become a relief time-saving arrival variation.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (1), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "4", the number of pending memories including the pending memory is "1", "2", or "3" When it is determined not to execute the arrival suspension performance, and when the number of suspension memories including the suspension storage is "4", it is decided to perform the arrival suspension performance.

Also, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "3", when the number of pending memories including the pending memory is "1", "2", or "4", the arrival pending effect is not executed. , and when the number of pending memories including the relevant pending memory is "3", it is decided to execute the arrival pending effect.

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "2", when the number of pending memories including the relevant pending memory is "1", "3" or "4", the arrival pending effect is not executed. , and when the number of pending memories including the relevant pending memory is "2", it is decided to execute the arrival pending effect.

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "1", when the number of pending memories including the relevant pending memory is "2", "3" or "4", the arrival pending effect is not executed. , and when the number of pending memories including the relevant pending memory is "1", it is decided to execute the arrival pending effect.

<Determination table for execution/non-execution of fixed pending effect>
FIG. 9-27(2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the fixed pending effect. As shown in FIG. 9-27 (2), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that whether or not the fixed pending effect is executed is different.

It is determined not to execute the fixed pending performance at a rate of 99%, and to execute the fixed pending performance at a rate of 1%.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the arrival pending effect is 100% when a predetermined condition (step S04TM2110: NO) is established when a pending memory that becomes a relief time-saving arrival occurs in the future. It is a performance that is performed in proportion. On the other hand, the fixed pending effect is a pending memory that does not lead to a short-time rescue in the future, and when the determination result of the pending memory is "big hit", a predetermined condition (step S04TM2190: YES) is established. It is an effect that is executed at a rate of 1% when there is.

[Condition table related to execution/non-execution of arrival suspension effect and finalized suspension effect in second special determination process]
FIG. 9-28 is a specific example of a condition table relating to execution/non-execution of the arrival suspension effect and the determination suspension effect of the second special determination process in the 2A embodiment. FIG. 9-28 shows condition no. It is an example of a table showing whether or not to execute an arrival pending effect and a fixed pending effect determined in the second special determination process when any one of the conditions (A1) to (A4) is satisfied.

Condition no. (A1)
・The value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of starting winning is 4 or less ・The display result of the pending memory is “missing”
・Any display result among the reserved memories in which the variable display is executed prior to the relevant reserved memory is “missing”
is established, it is possible to execute the arrival pending effect and not to execute the fixed pending effect (not executable).

Condition no. When (A1) is established, in the second special determination process (see FIG. 9-26), the process advances from step S04TM2110: NO to S04TM2120: YES, and the process (S04TM2130) for determining whether or not to execute an arrival suspension effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the arrival suspension effect. In addition, step S04TM2170: NO is performed, and the process of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2202) is executed, so the fixed pending effect is not executed.

Condition no. (A2)
・The value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of starting winning is 4 or less ・The display result of the pending memory is “big hit”
is established, the arrival pending effect is not executed (executable) and the fixed pending effect is not executed (executable).

Condition no. When (A2) is established, step S04TM2110: YES in the second special determination process (see FIG. 9-26), and the process (S04TM2132) of determining not to execute the arrival suspension effect is executed. Do not execute the arrival pending effect. In addition, the processing proceeds from step S04TM2170: YES to step S04TM2190: NO, and the processing (step S04TM2202) for determining not to execute the fixed pending effect is executed, so the fixed pending effect is not executed.

Condition no. (A3)
・The value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of starting winning is 5 or more ・The display result of the pending memory is “big hit”
is established, the arrival pending effect is not executed (executable), and the fixed pending effect can be executed.

Condition no. When (A3) is established, step S04TM2110: YES in the second special determination process (see FIG. 9-26), and the process (S04TM2132) of determining not to execute the arrival suspension effect is executed. Do not execute the arrival pending effect. In addition, since the processing proceeds from step S04TM2170: YES to step S04TM2190: YES, and the processing (step S04TM2200) for determining whether or not to execute the fixed pending effect is executed, the fixed pending effect can be executed.

Condition no. (A4)
・The value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of starting winning is 4 or less ・When the display result of the pending memory is “big hit” and the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation is established, the arrival suspension effect is not executed (executable) , the fixed pending effect is not executed (executable).

Condition no. When (A4) is established, step S04TM2110: YES in the second special determination process (see FIG. 9-26), and the process (S04TM2132) for determining not to execute the arrival pending effect is executed. Do not execute the arrival pending effect. In addition, the processing proceeds from step S04TM2170: YES to step S04TM2190: NO, and the processing (step S04TM2202) for determining not to execute the fixed pending effect is executed, so the fixed pending effect is not executed.

[Count display]
In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability / low base state, the count display CT (this In an example, it is possible to display characters such as "until play time", characters "XXX more times", and triangular objects (see FIG. 9-29). Hereinafter, the count display will be referred to as "specific number display" or "count number display" as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the number of times displayed in the count display (part of the number "XXX more times") is determined based on the value of the relief time reduction number counter. As the number of times displayed in the count display, a number corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter +1 is displayed. For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "4", the count display displays the characters "5 more times". Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "499", the characters "500 more times" are displayed in the count display.

[Dream mode pending display, active display]
In the present embodiment, when a pending memory for reaching a relief time reduction occurs, by changing the pending display corresponding to the pending memory to a dream mode different from the normal mode, the arrival of the relief time reduction is notified. An arrival pending effect can be executed. Further, by changing the pending display corresponding to the pending memory to a dream mode different from the normal mode when the pending memory does not lead to the relief time reduction and the judgment result of the pending memory is "jackpot". , it is possible to execute a fixed pending effect for notifying that a big hit will be achieved.

In this embodiment, the normal aspect pending display is an image of a white round object. On the other hand, the pending display of the dream-dream mode is an image including an image imitating the first character CA1 in a white round object.

In the present embodiment, when the reserved display in the dream mode is displayed, the active display while the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory is being executed is also displayed in the dream mode. Hereinafter, the suspended display or the active display will be referred to as "corresponding display" as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the pending display of the dream-dream mode in the case of the reaching pending effect and the pending display of the dream-dreaming mode in the case of the fixed pending effect are common display modes. Therefore, at first glance, the player may not be able to accurately recognize which of the arrival suspension effect and the fixed suspension effect is being executed, but the current number of fluctuations after the power is turned on or the previous big hit has occurred. By calculating the current number of changes in , it is possible to roughly recognize which effect is being executed.

<Example of production of display corresponding to dream mode>
FIG. 9-29 is an explanatory diagram showing the effects of various effects when corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) of the dream-dream mode are displayed. FIG. 9-29(1) is an explanatory diagram showing various effects when the dream-and-dream mode pending display is displayed. FIG. 9-29(2) is an explanatory diagram showing the effects of various effects when the dream-like active display is displayed. In FIGS. 9-29, the other effect images that are not related to the corresponding display of the dream/dream mode are the same as the above-described effect images, so description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 9-29 (1), the first pending memory associated with the start winning that occurred when the number of first pending memories is 2 (the third variable display is executed among the variable displays whose execution is pending) 1 pending storage) is determined to execute either the arrival pending effect or the fixed pending effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-29 (1), at the timing when a new starting prize is generated, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the number of first pending memories has become 3. Any of the suspension effects is executed, and the first suspension display PD1M in the dream mode is displayed in the first suspension display area PD1E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“X times to play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In FIG. 9-29 (2), it is assumed that it has been decided to execute either the arrival pending effect or the fixed pending effect for the first pending memory, and the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory shall be performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-29 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 executes the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories has become 0. , an arrival pending effect or a fixed pending effect is executed, and an active display ACM in a dream mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“Y times left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

<Production example of arrival hold production>
FIGS. 9-30 and 9-31 are explanatory diagrams showing effects modes of various effects when the arrival suspension effect is executed. In FIGS. 9-30 and 9-31, other effect images that are not related to the arrival suspension effect are the same as the above-described effect images, so the description may be omitted.

In this example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "4", the first pending memory associated with the start winning that occurred when the first pending memory number is "3" (variable When the first reserved memory in which the fourth variable display is executed among the displays is the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation, the first reserved memory is targeted and the arrival reserved performance is executed in the second special determination process. shall be determined.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 4), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“Five times left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 3. In addition, in the active display area ACE, the active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed, and in the first reserved display area PD1E, three first suspended displays PD1 in the normal mode are displayed. display.

In this state, a new starting prize is generated, and the first pending memory associated with this starting prize is a relief short-time arrival variation, and it is decided to execute the arrival pending effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (2), when a new start winning occurs and the number of first pending storage becomes 4, the effect control CPU 120 executes the arrival pending effect, and the first pending display area. A new first pending display PD1M in the dream-dream mode is displayed on PD1E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "246") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("246" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area PD1E to display three first reserved displays PD1 in the normal mode and one first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode. The active display AC is erased from the display area ACE in response to the fact that the variable display is not executed at present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 3), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“Four times left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories has become 3, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E (the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode: 2 pieces , dream mode first pending display PD1M: 1) are shifted one by one toward the active display area ACE side, and the normal mode active display AC corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed in the active display area ACE. display anew.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols ("135" in this example) is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("135" in this example) is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area PD1E to display two first reserved displays PD1 in the normal mode and one first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode. The active display AC is erased from the display area ACE in response to the fact that the variable display is not executed at present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 2), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“Three times left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories has become 2, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E (the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode: 1 piece , dream mode first pending display PD1M: 1) are shifted one by one toward the active display area ACE side, and the normal mode active display AC corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed in the active display area ACE. display anew.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "142") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("142" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area PD1E to display one first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode and one first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode. The active display AC is erased from the display area ACE in response to the fact that the variable display is not executed at present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (8), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter=1), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“Two times left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories has become 1, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E (the first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode: 1 ) is shifted by one toward the active display area ACE, and the active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed in the active display area ACE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "325") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("325" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays one dream-like first reserved display PD1M in the first reserved display area PD1E, corresponding to the fact that the active display area ACE is not currently being displayed in a variable manner. to erase the active display AC.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter=0), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“one time left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 erases the first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 0, and displays the active display. In the area ACE, a dream-like active display ACM corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (11), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "631") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("631" in this example) is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 erases the dream-like active display ACM from the active display area ACE in response to the fact that the variable display is not being executed at present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (12), when the CPU 103 controls the game state to the time saving state B (relief time saving), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the relief time saving has started on the entire screen of the image display device 5. A play time start screen (in this example, characters of "enter play time") is displayed, and a right hitting promotion display RI instructing right hitting is displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

<Production example of fixed pending production>
FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33 are explanatory diagrams showing effects modes of various effects when the fixed pending effect is executed. In FIGS. 9-32 and 9-33, other effect images that are not related to the finalized pending effect are the same as the above-described effect images, so the description may be omitted.

In this example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "499", the first suspension memory (execution is suspended variable When the display result of the first reserved memory in which the variable display is executed fourth among the displays is "big hit", the fixed reserved performance is executed in the second special judgment processing for this first reserved memory. shall decide.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 499), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“500 times left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 3. In addition, the active display area ACE is newly displayed in the active display area ACE in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display that is currently being executed, and the first suspended display PD1 in the normal mode is displayed in the first suspended display area PD1E three times. display each.

In this state, a new starting prize is generated, and the display result of the first holding memory associated with this starting prize is "big hit", and it is decided to execute the fixed holding performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (2), when a new start winning occurs and the number of first pending storage becomes 4, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fixed pending effect, and the first pending display area. A new first pending display PD1M in the dream-dream mode is displayed on PD1E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "246") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("246" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area PD1E to display three first reserved displays PD1 in the normal mode and one first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode. The active display AC is erased from the display area ACE in response to the fact that the variable display is not executed at present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 498), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“499 more times until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories has become 3, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E (the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode: 2 pieces , dream mode first pending display PD1M: 1) are shifted one by one toward the active display area ACE side, and the normal mode active display AC corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed in the active display area ACE. display anew.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols ("135" in this example) is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("135" in this example) is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area PD1E to display two first reserved displays PD1 in the normal mode and one first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode. The active display AC is erased from the display area ACE in response to the fact that the variable display is not executed at present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 497), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“498 more times until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories has become 2, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E (the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode: 1 piece , dream mode first pending display PD1M: 1) are shifted one by one toward the active display area ACE side, and the normal mode active display AC corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed in the active display area ACE. display anew.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "142") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("142" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area PD1E to display one first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode and one first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode. The active display AC is erased from the display area ACE in response to the fact that the variable display is not executed at present.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (8), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 496), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“497 more times until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories has become 1, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E (the first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode: 1 ) is shifted by one toward the active display area ACE, and the active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed in the active display area ACE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the final combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "325") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("325" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays one dream-like first reserved display PD1M in the first reserved display area PD1E, corresponding to the fact that the active display area ACE is not currently being displayed in a variable manner. to erase the active display AC.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 495), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“496 times left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 erases the first reserved display PD1M in the dream-dream mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 0, and displays the active display. In the area ACE, a dream-like active display ACM corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (11), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command executes the victory effect, and the screen center. In addition to displaying the first character CA1 on the screen, the characters "victory" are displayed in the upper left part of the screen, and a combination of decorative patterns ("222" in this example) indicating a big win is displayed in the upper right part of the screen. In this state, the final combination of small symbols ("222" in this example) is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that result in the display result of "big hit" is determined and stopped.

[Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation]
FIG. 9-34 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of variation in the second embodiment. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-34 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 9-34.

In FIG. 9-34, the processes of steps S04TM1110 to S04TM1180 are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 9-14, so description thereof will be omitted.

Step S04TM1170: NO, or after the processing of step S04TM1180, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 4 or less (step S04TM2310).

When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 4 or less (step S04TM2310: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 4 or less (that is, if the relief time reduction number counter value is 5 or more) (step S04TM2310: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fixed cut-in effect is executed. , based on the table (see FIG. 9-35) for determining whether or not to execute the fixed cut-in effect (step S04TM2320), and the process ends.

[Tables referenced in the processing for determining effects at the start of variation]
FIG. 9-35 is a specific example of a table referred to in the variation start effect determination process in the second embodiment. FIG. 9-35 is an example of the execution/non-execution decision table of the confirmed cut-in effect that is referred to when deciding whether or not to execute the confirmed cut-in effect in step S04TM2320.

<Determination table for execution/non-execution of fixed cut-in effect>
FIG. 9-35 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the fixed cut-in effect. As shown in FIG. 9-35, in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the fixed cut-in effect differs depending on whether the display result is "loss" or "big win". ing.

When the display result is "missed" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missed"), it is decided not to execute the fixed cut-in performance at a rate of 100%.

2. When the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), 98% of the time, it is decided not to execute the fixed cut-in effect; It is decided to execute the fixed cut-in effect at a rate of %.

In this way, the fixed cut-in effect is not executed when the display result is "lost", and can be executed (2%) only when the display result is "big hit". It is a kind of big hit confirmation production to be notified.

[Confirmed cut-in effect]
In the present embodiment, in the variable display in which the display result is a "big hit", when the ready-to-win is established, the fixed cut-in effect can be executed. The fixed cut-in effect is a big hit fixed effect in which a confirmed cut-in image CI is displayed in a cut-in display area (central part of the screen) of the image display device 5 to notify that the big win is fixed. The confirmed cut-in image CI is an image containing rainbow-colored characters of "Congratulations" congratulating the confirmed jackpot.

<Production example of fixed cut-in production>
FIG. 9-36 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of various effects when the fixed cut-in effect is executed. In FIG. 9-36, other effect images (suspended display, active display, background image, etc.) unrelated to the confirmed cut-in effect are the same as the above-described other effect images, so description thereof is omitted.

In this example, it is assumed that execution of the fixed cut-in effect is determined in the process of determining the effect at the time of variation start corresponding to the variable display currently being executed (FIG. 9-34).

First, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the image display device In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the variable display of decorative symbols is started, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small symbols is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (2), at the timing when the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern should be established, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols "2" in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. is displayed in a stopped state, and characters of "reach!!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decoration pattern is stopped, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (3), at the timing when the fixed cut-in effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fixed cut-in effect and cuts to the cut-in display area of the image display device 5. An in-image CI (in this example, an image including rainbow-colored characters of “congratulations”) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (4), at the timing when the fluctuation pattern should be developed to super reach, the effect control CPU 120 ends the fixed cut-in effect, starts the battle effect, and displays the image display device. 5, a battle start image including the first character CA1, the enemy character CB, and the characters "VS" is displayed.

[2nd B embodiment]
In the 2B embodiment of the second embodiment, even if the suspended memory reaches the relief time reduction, the display result of one of the suspended memories in which the variable display is executed before the suspended memory is " It is possible to limit the execution of the arrival pending effect for the relevant pending memory when it is a "jackpot".

In addition, when the suspended memory reaches the relief time reduction, even if the display result of the suspended memory is "big hit", any of the suspended memories that perform variable display before the suspended memory When the display result is a "big hit", it is possible to limit the execution of the fixed pending effect for the relevant pending memory.

[Second Special Judgment Processing]
FIG. 9-37 is a flow chart showing the second special determination process in the 2B embodiment. The effect control CP 120 executes the second special determination process in the start winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-25.

In FIG. 9-37, processes other than step S04TM2180 are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 9-26, so description thereof is omitted.

Step S04TM2170: After the YES process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result of any one of the pending memories in which variable display is executed prior to the relevant pending memory is a "big hit" ( step S04TM2180).

If none of the display results of the pending memories in which the variable display is executed prior to the pending memory is a "jackpot" (step S04TM2180: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2190.

If the display result of any one of the pending memories in which the variable display is executed prior to the pending memory is a "jackpot" (step S04TM2180: YES), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2202. .

[Condition table related to execution/non-execution of arrival suspension effect and finalized suspension effect in second special determination process]
FIG. 9-38 is a specific example of a condition table relating to execution/non-execution of the arrival suspension effect and the determination suspension effect of the second special determination process in the 2B embodiment. FIG. 9-38 shows condition no. (A1) to (A3), and when any of the conditions (B1) and (B2) are established, the presence or absence of execution of the arrival pending effect and the fixed pending effect determined in the second special determination process is indicated. This is an example of a table with Condition No. in Fig. 9-38. (A1) to (A3) correspond to condition Nos. in FIG. 9-28. Since it is the same as (A1) to (A3), the explanation is omitted.

Condition no. (B1)
・The value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of starting winning is 4 or less ・The display result of the relevant pending memory is “missing” and the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation ・Of the pending memories whose variable display is executed before the relevant pending memory One of the displayed results is a "jackpot"
is established, the arrival pending effect is not executed (executable) and the fixed pending effect is not executed (executable).

Condition no. When (B1) is established, step S04TM2110: YES in the second special determination process (see FIG. 9-37), and the process (S04TM2132) for determining not to execute the arrival suspension effect is executed. Do not execute the arrival pending effect. In addition, step S04TM2170: NO is performed, and the process of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2202) is executed, so the fixed pending effect is not executed.

Condition no. (B2)
・The value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of starting winning is 4 or less ・The display result of the relevant pending memory is “big hit” and the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation One of the displayed results is a "jackpot"
is established, the arrival pending effect is not executed (executable) and the fixed pending effect is not executed (executable).

Condition no. When (B2) is established, step S04TM2110: YES in the second special determination process (see FIG. 9-37), and the process (S04TM2132) of determining not to execute the arrival suspension effect is executed. Do not execute the arrival pending effect. In addition, the process proceeds from step S04TM2170: YES to step S04TM2180: YES, and the process of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2202) is executed, so the fixed pending effect is not executed.

<Example of production when a starting prize that reaches a short time for relief occurs while there is a hold that will be a big hit>
FIG. 9-39 shows a case where the pending memory corresponding to the newly generated start winning reaches the relief time-saving, and the display result of the pending memory is "loss", and the variable display is preceded by the pending memory. is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of various effects when the display result of any one of the pending memories in which is executed is "big hit". In FIGS. 9-39, other effect images (suspended display, active display, background image, etc.) that are not related to the characteristic effect in the above case are the same as the other effect images described above, so the description is omitted. do.

In this example, in the second special determination process (see FIG. 9-37) targeting the pending memory for the newly generated starting prize, it is determined not to execute the arrival pending effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 4), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“Five times left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 3. In addition, in the active display area ACE, the active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed, and in the first reserved display area PD1E, three first suspended displays PD1 in the normal mode are displayed. display.

In this state, a new starting prize is generated, and the first suspension memory associated with this starting prize is the relief short-time arrival fluctuation, and it is decided not to execute the arrival suspension performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (2), a new start winning (reservation storage that becomes a relief time reduction arrival) occurs, and when the first reservation storage number becomes 4, the effect control CPU 120 reaches Reservation production is not executed, one new first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode instead of the dream mode is displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E.

<Example of production in the case of a short-time relief and a start-up prize that will be a big hit in a state where there is a hold that will be a big hit>
FIG. 9-40 shows a case where the pending memory corresponding to the newly generated starting prize reaches in a short relief time and the display result of the pending memory is "big hit", and the variable display is preceded by the pending memory. is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of various effects when the display result of any one of the pending memories in which is executed is "big hit". In FIGS. 9-40, other effect images (suspended display, active display, background image, etc.) that are not related to the characteristic effect in the above case are the same as the other effect images described above, so the description is omitted. do.

In this example, in the second special determination process (see FIG. 9-37) targeting the pending memory for the newly generated starting prize, it is decided not to execute the fixed pending effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 4), the effect control CPU 120 is the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command. Based on the pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small patterns are changed. start the display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a count display (“Five times left until play time”) on the lower right portion of the screen.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 3. In addition, in the active display area ACE, the active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed, and in the first reserved display area PD1E, three first suspended displays PD1 in the normal mode are displayed. display.

In this state, a new starting prize is generated, and the first holding memory associated with this starting prize is ``jackpot'' and short relief arrival fluctuation, and it is decided not to execute the fixed holding performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), when a new start winning (reserved memory that becomes a relief time reduction arrival) occurs and the number of first reserved memories becomes 4, the effect control CPU 120 is a fixed reserved effect is not executed, one new first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode instead of the dream mode is displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E.

[Table for determining whether or not to display the count display]
In the second embodiment, it is possible to execute effect determination processing (count display determination processing) for determining whether or not to display the count display, which is executed when waiting for the start of variation or when starting the variation. The effect control CPU 120 executes count display determination processing in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) and the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

FIG. 9-41 is a specific example of a table referred to in the count display determination process according to the second embodiment. FIG. 9-41 is an example of a count display display presence/absence determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to display a count display.

FIG. 9-41 shows No. corresponding to the state of the gaming machine. , the state of the gaming machine, and whether or not the count display (the specific number of times display) is displayed.

(1) In the case of the state of "normal mode from turning on the power to the jackpot that occurred before reaching the relief time reduction", the count display is not displayed. Specifically, the count display is not displayed during the period from when the power is turned on (with or without execution of RAM clear processing) until the first big hit occurs before the time-saving relief is reached.

(2) The count display is not displayed in the state of "normal mode from power-on to arrival of short-time relief". Specifically, the count display is not displayed during the period from when the power is turned on (with or without execution of RAM clear processing) to when the relief time is reduced.

(3) In the case of the state of "a normal mode controlled after the occurrence of a big hit before reaching a short relief time after the power is turned on", the count display is displayed. Specifically, after the power is turned on (with or without RAM clear processing), a big hit occurs before the relief time is reached, and at least during the period during which the normal mode is controlled after the big hit including the big hit, the count Display is displayed.

(4) In the case of the state of "a normal mode in which control is performed in a short time after the power is turned on and after a big hit occurs in a short time in relief", the count display is displayed. Specifically, after the power is turned on (with or without RAM clear processing), the relief time is reached, the relief time is controlled (time reduction state B), and a big hit occurs during this relief time, at least the big hit. The count display is displayed during the period during which the normal mode is controlled after the jackpot including.

(5) In the case of the state of "a normal mode in which control is performed in a short time after the power is turned on and control is performed in a short time and without the occurrence of a big win", the count display is not displayed. Specifically, after the power is turned on (with or without RAM clear processing execution), the relief time is reached, the relief time is controlled (time reduction state B), and the jackpot does not occur during the relief time. The count display is not displayed during the period in which the normal mode is controlled after the variable display of is completed.

In this embodiment, when the relief time reduction (time reduction state B) is reached and the variable display of the specified number of times is performed without a big hit occurring in the time reduction state B, a configuration is adopted that does not reach the relief time reduction again. In the situation (5), the count display is not displayed.

In this embodiment, information output processing (jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), starting information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.) to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, Processing for outputting data such as variation information (information indicating the number of variations, etc.)) (see step S23 in FIG. 4), the data counter installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 determines the amount of time between the big hits based on the variation information. The number of fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as "variation number data" as appropriate) can be displayed.

For example, when the number of fluctuations from the previous big win is 800, when the power is turned off and then turned on, the player can refer to the fluctuation number data of the data counter before turning on the power. It is possible to recognize that the number of fluctuations from the big win was 800 times. In other words, it is possible to estimate the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reached.

However, in this embodiment, when the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as “hot start” as appropriate), the value of the relief time reduction counter is the value taken over from the value before the power was turned on. (950-800=“150” in this example). On the other hand, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "cold start" as appropriate), the value of the relief time reduction counter does not take over the value before the power is turned on, but the initial value ( In this example, "950") is set. It should be noted that the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the player cannot recognize whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on.

Also, even in the case of a hot start when the power is turned on, a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk at a game hall, etc.) may perform several times to check the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 after the power is turned on. A variable display may also be in effect.

In view of these circumstances, as shown in FIG. 9-41, after the power is turned on, if it is controlled to the normal state (normal mode), the period until the big hit occurs before reaching the relief time reduction In the period until the relief time reduction is reached, the count display (specified number of times display) is not displayed, so that a specific player (for example, the data counter only immediately after turning on the power) can determine which number of fluctuations will reach the relief time reduction. making it difficult for the referencing player) to accurately perceive. However, although it is not possible to accurately recognize whether or not it is a hot start, it is possible for the player to guess roughly at what number of fluctuations the relief time is reached.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the fixed pending effect can be executed regardless of the jackpot type has been shown. It is possible to

[Production determination process at the time of start winning]
FIG. 9-42 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the time of start winning in this embodiment. The effect control CP 120 executes the start winning time effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Note that the description of the same processing as in FIG. 9-25 is omitted.

After the process of step S04TM1010, effect control CPU 120 executes a third special determination process (see FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44) (step S04TM3010), and advances the process to step S04TM2020.

[3rd A embodiment]
In the 3A embodiment of the third embodiment, when the determination result of the pending memory is "3R time saving jackpot", the fixed pending effect targeting the pending memory can be executed, while the pending memory is a "3R normal jackpot", it is possible to limit the execution of the fixed pending effect for the relevant pending memory.

[Third Special Judgment Process]
FIG. 9-43 is a flow chart showing the third special determination process in the 3A embodiment. The effect control CP 120 executes the third special determination process in the start winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-42. Note that the description of the same processing as in FIG. 9-26 is omitted.

After the process of step S04TM2160 or step S04TM2134, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result of the pending memory is "3R short time jackpot" (step S04TM3110).

When the display result of the pending memory is "3R time-saving jackpot" (step S04TM3110: YES), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2190.

When the display result of the reserved memory is not "3R time-saving jackpot", that is, when the display result of the reserved memory is "3R normal jackpot" (step S04TM3110: NO), effect control CPU 120 performs step S04TM2202. proceed to

In this way, when the display result of the pending storage is "3R time-saving jackpot" (step S04TM3110: YES), it is possible to execute the process (step S04TM2200) for determining whether or not to execute the fixed pending effect. It is possible to perform a production. On the other hand, when the display result of the pending memory is "3R normal jackpot" (step S04TM3110: NO), the process (step S04TM2202) of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect is executed, so the fixed pending effect is executed. don't run

[3B embodiment]
In the 3B embodiment of the third embodiment, when the variation pattern of the suspension memory is different from the "super reach B jackpot", it is possible to execute the fixed suspension performance for the suspension memory. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the pending memory is "super reach B jackpot", it is possible to limit the execution of the fixed pending effect for the pending memory. That is, this is an embodiment in which the resurrection effect is not executed when the fixed pending effect is executed.

[Third Special Judgment Process]
FIG. 9-44 is a flow chart showing the third special determination process in the 3B embodiment. The effect control CP 120 executes the third special determination process in the start winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-42. Note that the description of the same processing as in FIG. 9-43 will be omitted.

Step S04TM3110: After the YES process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the pending memory is "super reach B jackpot" (step S04TM3120).

When the variation pattern of the reserved storage is not "super reach B jackpot", that is, when the variation pattern is either "normal reach jackpot" or "super reach A jackpot" (step S04TM3120: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2190.

When the variation pattern of the pending memory is "super reach B big hit" (step S04TM3120: YES), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2202.

In this way, when the variation pattern of the pending memory is not "super reach B jackpot" (step S04TM3120: NO), it is possible to execute the process (step S04TM2200) for determining whether or not to execute the fixed pending effect. It is possible to perform a production. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the pending storage is "super reach B jackpot" (step S04TM3120: YES), the process of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2202) is executed, so the fixed pending effect is executed. do not run Since the variation pattern of the ``super reach B big win'' is the variation of the big win via the resurrection performance, the variation pattern when the fixed holding performance is executed is the variation of the big win not via the resurrection performance.

[Resurrection production]
In this embodiment, when the variation pattern is "super reach B jackpot", at a predetermined opportunity (operation of push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) in the battle production, a defeat production is executed, and the final display result is " After it is once reported (suggested) that it will be lost, the resurrection performance is executed, and after the resurrection performance, the victory performance is executed to inform that the final display result is a ``big hit''.

<Production example of revival production>
FIG. 9-45 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of various effects when the resurrection effect is executed. In FIG. 9-45, other effect images (small symbols, etc.) that are not related to the resurrection effect are the same as those in FIGS.

In this example, when the variation pattern is "super ready-to-win B jackpot", a series of effects of defeat effect→resurrection effect→victory effect is executed.

First, FIG. 9-45(1) is the same as FIG. 9-23(5), so its explanation is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (2), at the timing to execute the defeat effect in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect, displays the enemy character CB in the center of the screen, The characters "defeat" are displayed in the upper left part of the screen, and a combination of decoration patterns ("212" in this example) indicating a failure is displayed in the upper right part of the screen. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (3), at the timing when the resurrection effect in the variation pattern should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the defeat effect, executes the resurrection effect, and displays the image display device 5. A blackout image BO is displayed on the entire screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the resurrection effect, erases the blackout image BO from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and Display the resurrection image on the entire screen. The restored image is an image including the second character CA2 on the left side of the screen, the third character CA3 on the right side of the screen, and the third dialogue telop TL3 at the bottom of the screen (common dialogue telop display area TLE). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces and outputs the third line voice from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this example, the dialogue telop corresponding to the second character CA2 and the third character CA3 is called the "third dialogue telop", and the dialogue audio corresponding to the second character CA2 and the third character CA3 is called the "third dialogue audio". called.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (5), at the timing when the winning effect in the variation pattern should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the resurrection effect, executes the winning effect, and displays the first The character CA1 is displayed, the characters "Victory" are displayed in the upper left part of the screen, and the combination of decorative patterns ("222" in this example) indicating a big win is displayed in the upper right part of the screen.

FIG. 9-45 (6) is the same as FIG. 9-33 (11), so the explanation is omitted.

[Big hit FF effect determination process]
FIG. 9-46 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed during the jackpot fanfare period (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot FF period") of the jackpot gaming state. The effect control CPU 120 executes the big hit FF effect determination process shown in FIGS. Specifically, upon receiving the jackpot start designation command, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the jackpot FF period by the jackpot FF effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-46.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fixed pending effect execution flag is set (step S04TM3210).

When the fixed pending effect execution flag is not set (step S04TM3210: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the promotion effect (step S04TM3220), determines the effect mode of the promotion effect (step S04TM3230), the process ends.

When the fixed pending effect execution flag is set (step S04TM3210: YES), the effect control CPU 120 decides to display a special movie (SP movie) described later without executing the promotion effect (step S04TM3210: YES). S04TM3240), the process ends.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the promotion performance is not executed when the fixed pending performance execution flag is set, the jackpot type when the fixed pending performance is executed is the ``3R time-saving big win''. In the third embodiment in which this is confirmed, after the confirmed suspension effect is executed, the promotion effect is executed in a state where it is known that the symbol will be promoted, and the interest is lowered. can be prevented.

[Promoting production]
In this embodiment, at the end of the variable display, the combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed to notify that it is a "normal jackpot", and then a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) is given during the jackpot fanfare period. , it is possible to execute a promotion performance that can be promoted from a normal pattern to a combination of time-saving patterns.

As a production pattern of the promotion production, there are a promotion pattern that is finally promoted to a time-saving design and a non-promotion pattern that is not promoted to a time-saving design with a normal design.

For example, when the display result is "3R time-saving jackpot", when the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is the combination of normal symbols, in step S04TM3230, promotion is performed as a promotion mode. Decide on a pattern.

In addition, when the display result is "3R time-saving jackpot", even when the combination of decorative patterns to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is a combination of time-saving patterns, in step S04TM3230, the promotion effect is produced. A promotion pattern is determined as a mode. At this time, although it is a promotion pattern, the time saving pattern stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display and the same time saving pattern in the promotion pattern of the promotion performance are displayed.

On the other hand, when the display result is "3R normal jackpot", in step S04TM3230, the non-promotion pattern is determined as the effect mode of the promotion effect.

<Production example of promotion production>
FIG. 9-47 is an explanatory diagram showing effects modes of various effects when promotion effects are executed.

In this example, in the variable display in which a big hit occurs, the combination of decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is determined to be the normal symbol ("222" in this example), and the big hit FF effect determination process (Fig. In 9-46), when it is decided to execute the promotion effect, (A) when it is decided to execute the promotion pattern, and (B) when it is decided to execute the non-promotion pattern. Shows an example of the production of.

First, FIG. 9-47(1) is the same as FIG. 9-33(11), so its explanation is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (2), when the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 that receives the jackpot start designation command executes the promotion effect, and the image display device 5 The symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are caused to display a combination of decorative symbols (normal symbol "222" in this example) which has been determined and stopped (stopped display) in the variable display executed immediately before.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes an operation prompting display BT on the decorative pattern on the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B in this example). In this example, the operation prompting display BT is formed by adding a character "Press!!" and a downward arrow above an object that imitates the push button 31B.

In this state, when the player operates the operation unit, the game advances to the promotion pattern shown in FIG. 9-47 (3A) or the non-promotion pattern shown in FIG. 9-47 (3B).

(promotion pattern)
As shown in FIG. 9-47 (3A), when the player operates the operation unit, the effect control CPU 120 executes the promotion pattern of the promotion effect, and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, , The combination of decoration patterns that has been confirmed and stopped (stopped display) in the variable display that was executed immediately before (in this example, normal pattern “222”) is changed to a combination of time-saving patterns (in this example, “777”) (promoted ).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (4A), the effect control CPU 120 ends the promotion effect and causes the entire screen of the image display device 5 to display a time saving jackpot start image. The time-saving jackpot start image is an image including characters of “RUSH BONUS” indicating that the time-saving jackpot is on.

(non-elevated pattern)
As shown in FIG. 9-47 (3B), when the player operates the operation unit, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-promotion pattern of the promotion effect, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the decoration pattern combination (in this example, normal pattern "222") that has been determined and stopped (stopped display) in the variable display that was executed immediately before remains the same normal pattern combination (in this example, "222"). Display continuously without change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (4B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the promotion effect, and displays the normal big win start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG. The normal jackpot start image is an image including characters of "BONUS" indicating a normal jackpot.

[Special movie during the jackpot FF period]
In the present embodiment, when the promotion performance is not executed in the big win FF period, the SP movie performance for displaying a predetermined video on the image display device 5 can be executed during the period when the promotion performance in the big win FF period should be executed.

In this embodiment, a special movie SPM (hereinafter referred to as "SP movie SPM" as appropriate) is set as the predetermined video. The SP movie SPM is a video including the first character CA1, the second character CA2, and the third character CA3, and is controlled to a more advantageous jackpot (in this example, a "short-time jackpot" that is more advantageous than the "normal jackpot"). It is a video that suggests that it will be done.

In this embodiment, only when the "3R time-saving big hit" occurs, the fixed pending effect can be executed, so when the big hit FF effect determination process is executed, the fixed pending effect execution flag is set. , the player can specify that the jackpot is a "3R time-saving jackpot". At this time, by executing the promotion performance in a state in which it is known that the player will be promoted, the player loses interest in the player. .

<Production example of the jackpot FF period when executing the fixed pending production>
FIG. 9-48 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of various performances when control is performed in the big win FF period after the fixed pending performance is executed in the variable display in which the big win occurs.

In this example, in the third special determination process (see FIG. 9-43 or FIG. 9-44) targeting variable display where a big hit occurs, it is assumed that execution of the fixed pending effect is decided. . Also, in the big hit FF effect determination process (see FIG. 9-46), it is assumed that the SP movie is determined to be displayed without executing the promotion effect.

First, FIG. 9-48 (1) is similar to FIG. 9-32 (2), FIG. 9-48 (2) is similar to FIG. 9-33 (10), and FIG. ) is the same as (11) in FIG. 9-33, so the description is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (4), when the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 that receives the jackpot start designation command executes the SP movie effect, and the image display device 5 to display the SP movie SPM on the entire screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (5), the effect control CPU 120 ends the SP movie effect and causes the image display device 5 to display a time-saving jackpot start image on the entire screen. The time-saving jackpot start image is an image including characters of “RUSH BONUS” indicating that the time-saving jackpot is on.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select an effect mode in which the execution frequency of the effect, the notification method of the display result, etc. are changed when the control is in the normal state (normal mode). When this performance mode is a predetermined performance mode, it is possible to limit the execution of the fixed suspension performance while the arrival suspension performance can be executed.

[Direction mode]
In this embodiment, two types of presentation modes shown in (1) and (2) below are set as the presentation mode. In addition, not only such a form but three or more types of production modes may be set.

(1) Default Mode The “default mode” effect mode is a effect mode in which the pre-reading notice effect and the fluctuation notice effect are executed at a normal rate. In the default mode, both the pre-reading announcement effect and the changing announcement effect can be executed, so this is an effect mode for players who want to enjoy various effects.

(2) Look-Ahead Off Mode The “look-ahead off-mode” effect mode is an effect mode in which the predictive effect during fluctuation is executed at a normal rate, but the predictive notice effect is not executed. In the look-ahead OFF mode, while the foretelling effect during fluctuation can be executed, the execution of the look-ahead foretelling effect is restricted.

[Production determination process at the time of start winning]
FIG. 9-49 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the time of start winning in this embodiment. The effect control CP 120 executes the start winning time effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Note that the description of the same processing as in FIG. 9-25 is omitted.

After the process of step S04TM1010, effect control CPU 120 executes a fourth special determination process (see FIG. 9-50), which will be described later (step S04TM4010), and advances the process to step S04TM2020.

Step S04TM2020: After the process of NO, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode is the "look-ahead OFF mode" (step S04TM4020).

If the effect mode is the "prefetch off mode" (step S04TM4020: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the effect mode is not the "look-ahead off mode", that is, if the effect mode is the "default mode" (step S04TM4020: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM1020.

In this way, when the effect mode is the "look-ahead mode", the processes after step S04TM1020 are skipped, so the look-ahead preview effect (zone effect in this example) is not executed.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the zone effect can be executed as the pre-reading foretelling effect has been shown.

For example, the effects (1) to (3) shown below may be executed as the preview effect.
(1) Hold change effect (2) Design chance eye effect (3) Lever vibration effect

(1) On-hold change effect The on-hold change effect suspends execution by displaying the display mode of the pending display in a display mode (either a blue mode or a red mode) different from the normal mode and the dream mode. It is a kind of pre-reading announcement effect that suggests the display result of the reserved memory that is being used.

(2) Symbol chance display The symbol chance display is performed when the decorative patterns are stopped in the variable display that is executed before the reserved memory that is the target of the notice, and the decorative patterns are displayed in the chance order (consecutive or reverse). etc.) to suggest the display result of the pending memory whose execution is suspended.

(3) Lever Vibration Effect The lever vibration effect vibrates the stick controller 31A in the variable display that is executed before the pending memory that is subject to notice, thereby displaying the display result of the pending memory. It is a kind of pre-reading foreshadowing to suggest.

When the configuration capable of executing these (1) to (3) pre-reading notice effects is adopted, the execution of these pre-reading notice effects is also restricted when the effect mode is the "pre-reading off mode".

[Fourth Special Judgment Processing]
FIG. 9-50 is a flow chart showing the fourth special determination process in the fourth embodiment. The effect control CP 120 executes the fourth special determination process in the start winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-49. In FIG. 9-50, processes other than step S04TM4110 are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 9-26, so description thereof will be omitted.

After the process of step S04TM2160 or step S04TM2134, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode is the "prefetch off mode" (step S04TM4110).

If the effect mode is not the "prefetch off mode", that is, if the effect mode is the "default mode" (step S04TM4110: NO), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2170.

If the effect mode is the "prefetch off mode" (step S04TM4110: YES), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S04TM2202.

In this way, when the effect mode is the "default mode" (step S04TM4110: NO), it is possible to execute the process (step S04TM2200) of determining whether or not to execute the fixed pending effect, so that the fixed pending effect can be executed. be. On the other hand, when the effect mode is "prefetch off mode" (step S04TM4110: YES), the process of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2202) is executed, so the fixed pending effect is not executed.

In addition, even if the effect mode is the "default mode" or the "prefetch off mode", it is possible to execute the process (step S04TM2130) for determining whether or not to execute the arrival pending effect, so the arrival pending effect is executed. It is possible.

[Direction mode selection method]
In the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special operation unit (in this example, a cross key (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1). Only the left and right keys of the special operation section are operable, and when the player operates the left and right keys of the special operation section, the presentation mode is switched.

Also, in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the count display), a special operation promotion display BT2 (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) prompting the player to operate the special operation unit, and a currently selected A production mode display (characters of "default mode" and characters of "prefetch off mode") showing information of the medium production mode is displayed.

In this embodiment, only the left and right keys of the special operation section are operable, so the special operation promotion display BT2 is displayed in a mode indicating that only the left and right keys of the special operation section are operable (only the left and right keys are colored). ) is displayed.

<Production example of production mode selection method>
As shown in FIG. 9-51 (1), when the player operates the left and right keys of the special operation unit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode: "default mode" and the effect mode display: "default mode". Switch to letters.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (2), when the player operates the left and right keys of the special operation section, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode: "prefetch OFF mode", effect mode display: "prefetch Switch to "off mode" characters. Then, when the player operates the left/right key part of the special operation section, the process returns to FIG. 9-51(1).

<Example of arrival hold effect and fixed hold effect in default mode>
FIG. 9-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of various effects when the arrival pending effect and the fixed pending effect are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the "default mode". Fig. 9-52 (A): (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of various effects when the arrival suspension effect is executed when the effect mode is controlled to the "default mode". is. Fig. 9-52 (B): (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of various effects when the fixed pending effect is executed when the effect mode is controlled to the "default mode". is.

<Production example of arrival hold production in default mode>
In FIG. 9-52 (A), the effect mode is controlled to "default mode", when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "4", and when the first pending memory number is "3" When the first pending memory associated with the generated starting winning (the first pending memory in which the fourth variable display is executed among the variable displays whose execution is pending) is the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation, this first reserve It is assumed that it is determined to execute the arrival suspension effect in the fourth special determination process for memory.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (A): (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 4), the effect control CPU 120 uses the variation pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, while starting the variable display of decorative patterns, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, Start the variable display of small patterns.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a count display (“5 more times until play time”) and a special operation promotion display BT2 (in this example, an icon imitating a cross key) on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. , and an effect mode display (characters of "default mode") showing information of the currently selected effect mode.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 3. In addition, in the active display area ACE, the active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed, and in the first reserved display area PD1E, three first suspended displays PD1 in the normal mode are displayed. display.

In this state, a new starting prize is generated, and the first pending memory associated with this starting prize is a relief short-time arrival variation, and it is decided to execute the arrival pending effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (A): (2), when a new start winning occurs and the number of first pending storage becomes 4, the effect control CPU 120 executes the arrival pending effect, 1 Newly display a first reserved display PD1M in a dream mode in the reserved display area PD1E.

<Production example of fixed pending production in default mode>
In FIG. 9-52 (B), the production mode is controlled to "default mode", when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "499", and when the first pending memory number is "3" When the display result of the first reserved memory (the first reserved memory in which the fourth variable display is executed among the variable displays whose execution is reserved) associated with the generated starting winning is "big win", this first reserved memory It is assumed that execution of the fixed pending effect is determined in the fourth special determination process for the pending memory.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (B): (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 499), the effect control CPU 120 uses the variation pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, while starting the variable display of decorative patterns, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, Start the variable display of small patterns.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a count display CT (“500 times left until play time”) and a special operation promotion display BT2 (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. ) and an effect mode display (characters of “default mode”) showing information of the currently selected effect mode.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 3. In addition, the active display area ACE is newly displayed in the active display area ACE in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display that is currently being executed, and the first suspended display PD1 in the normal mode is displayed in the first suspended display area PD1E three times. display each.

In this state, a new starting prize is generated, and the display result of the first holding memory associated with this starting prize is "big hit", and it is decided to execute the fixed holding performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (B): (2), when a new start winning occurs and the number of first pending memories becomes 4, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fixed pending effect, 1 Newly display a first reserved display PD1M in a dream mode in the reserved display area PD1E.

<Example of arrival hold effect and fixed hold effect in look-ahead off mode>
FIG. 9-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of various effects when the arrival pending effect is executed and the fixed pending effect is not executed when the effect mode is controlled to the "prediction off mode". is. Fig. 9-53 (A): (1) to (2) are descriptions showing the effect modes of various effects when the arrival suspension effect is executed when the effect mode is controlled to the "prediction off mode". It is a diagram. Fig. 9-53 (B): (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of various effects when the fixed pending effect is not executed when the effect mode is controlled to the "prefetch off mode". is.

<Production example of arrival hold production in look-ahead off mode>
In FIG. 9-53 (A), the effect mode is controlled to "prefetch off mode", the value of the relief time reduction counter is "4", and the first pending memory number is "3" When the first pending memory associated with the start winning that occurred in (the first pending memory in which the fourth variable display is executed among the variable displays whose execution is pending) is a relief time reduction arrival fluctuation, this first It is assumed that execution of the arrival suspension effect is determined in the fourth special determination process for the suspension storage.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (A): (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 4), the effect control CPU 120 uses the variation pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, while starting the variable display of decorative patterns, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, Start the variable display of small patterns.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a count display (“5 more times until play time”) and a special operation promotion display BT2 (in this example, an icon imitating a cross key) on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. , and an effect mode display (characters of "prefetch OFF mode") showing information of the currently selected effect mode.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 3. In addition, in the active display area ACE, the active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is newly displayed, and in the first reserved display area PD1E, three first suspended displays PD1 in the normal mode are displayed. display.

In this state, a new starting prize is generated, and the first pending memory associated with this starting prize is a relief short-time arrival variation, and it is decided to execute the arrival pending effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (A): (2), when a new start winning occurs and the number of first pending storage becomes 4, the effect control CPU 120 executes the arrival pending effect, 1 Newly display a first reserved display PD1M in a dream mode in the reserved display area PD1E.

<Production example when fixed pending production is not executed in look-ahead off mode>
In FIG. 9-53 (B), the production mode is controlled to "prefetch off mode", the value of the relief time reduction counter is "499", and the first pending memory number is "3" When the display result of the first reserved memory (the first reserved memory in which the fourth variable display is executed among the variable displays whose execution is reserved) associated with the start winning that occurred in In the fourth special determination process, it is determined not to execute the fixed pending effect for the 1 pending memory.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B): (1), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time reduction number counter = 499), the effect control CPU 120 uses the variation pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, while starting the variable display of decorative patterns, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, Start the variable display of small patterns.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a count display CT (“500 times left until play time”) and a special operation promotion display BT2 (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. ), and an effect mode display (characters of "prefetch off mode") showing information of the currently selected effect mode.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E to the active display area ACE side based on the fact that the first reserved storage number has become 3. In addition, the active display area ACE is newly displayed in the active display area ACE in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display that is currently being executed, and the first suspended display PD1 in the normal mode is displayed in the first suspended display area PD1E three times. display each.

In this state, a new starting prize is generated, and the display result of the first holding memory associated with this starting prize is "big hit", and it is decided not to execute the fixed holding performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B): (2), when a new start winning occurs and the number of first pending memories becomes 4, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the fixed pending effect, One new first reserved display PD1 in the normal mode is displayed in the first reserved display area PD1E.

(Effect 1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, in the first conversation preview effect, a first dialogue telop TL1 corresponding to the first character CA1, a second dialogue telop TL2 corresponding to the second character CA2, is displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 . Also, the first character CA1 speaks when the first line telop is displayed, and the second character CA2 speaks when the second line telop is displayed.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of characters are having a conversation, the dialogue corresponding to each character is displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 instead of the specific area corresponding to each character. Since the display can be displayed, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the background image from being excessively lowered. In addition, when the dialogue display corresponding to each character is displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE, each character speaks, thereby eliminating the monotony in the effect in which the characters converse. It becomes easy for the player to recognize whether the character is speaking.

(Effect 2)
As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, in the first conversation preview effect, the first dialogue telop TL1 is displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE of the image display device 5, and the first dialogue voice is output to the speaker. A first conversation control for reproducing and outputting from 8L and 8R, and a second dialogue control for displaying second dialogue telop TL2 in common dialogue telop display area TLE of image display device 5 and reproducing and outputting second dialogue sound from speakers 8L and 8R. Conversation control and .

Also, when the first character CA1 moves from the right part of the screen of the image display device 5 to the center part of the screen, the first conversation control is executed, and the second character CA2 moves from the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 to the screen center part. When moving to the central portion, the second conversation control is being executed, and when the first character CA1 and the second character CA2 are positioned in the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5, the first conversation control is executed to three. , and the second conversation control is executed three times.

According to such a configuration, by moving the first character CA1 from the right part of the screen of the image display device 5 to the center part of the screen, the first conversation control is executed in a state in which the player's attention is focused on the first character CA1. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the first conversation control corresponding to the first character CA1. Further, by moving the second character CA2 from the left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to the center portion of the screen, the second conversation control can be executed in a state in which the player's attention is focused on the second character CA2. The production effect of the second conversation control corresponding to 2 characters CA2 can be enhanced. Then, when the first character CA1 and the second character CA2 are positioned at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, by executing the first conversation control and the second conversation control a plurality of times respectively, the first It is possible to further enhance the presentation effect of the conversation control and the second conversation control.

(Effect 3)
As shown in FIG. 9-23, in the battle conversation preview effect during the battle effect, the first dialogue telop TL1 corresponding to the first character CA1 and the third dialogue telop TL3 corresponding to the enemy character CB are displayed as images. It is displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE at the bottom of the screen of the device 5 . Also, a first line voice corresponding to the first character CA1 and a third line voice corresponding to the enemy character CB are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of characters converse in a battle production, a dialogue telop corresponding to each character is displayed in the common dialogue telop display area TLE at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and a speaker is displayed. Since the dialogue voice corresponding to each character can be output from 8L and 8R, the dialogue telop and dialogue voice unique to the character can be emphasized without lowering the visibility of the background image, and whether or not the game will be a big hit. It is possible to improve the interest in the suggested super reach.

(Effect 4)
As shown in FIG. 9-15, the background CU effect is a effect that suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when the effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. A chance-up image (in this example, a star-shaped object) displayed in the CU production is an image that is smaller and less visible than other objects (for example, mountains, sky, sun, etc.) included in the normal background image BI1. , which is an image that is smaller and less visible than other objects (for example, decoration patterns, pending display, active display, etc.) that are not normally included in the background image BI1.

According to such a configuration, the background CU effect using a chance-up image (in this example, a star-shaped object) with relatively low visibility is executed, so that the player usually pays attention to the details of the background image. It is possible to improve interest when the background image is normally displayed.

(Effect 5)
As shown in FIG. 9-12, the zone effect is a look-ahead forewarning effect that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 9-13, When the zone effect is executed, a special background image (a background image representing a volcanic landscape including the characters "POWERFUL ZONE") different from the normal background image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as a background image with a decorative pattern. is displayed.

According to such a configuration, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the type of background image, it is possible to improve interest when the background image is displayed.

(Effect 6)
As shown in FIGS. 9-20 and 9-21, in the second conversation preview effect, the first dialogue telop TL1 corresponding to the first character CA1 is displayed in the first dialogue telop display area at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5. The second dialogue telop TL2 displayed on TLE1 and corresponding to the second character CA2 is displayed in the second dialogue telop display area TLE2 at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. Also, the first character CA1 speaks when the first line telop is displayed, and the second character CA2 speaks when the second line telop is displayed.

In addition, in the second conversation advance notice effect, it is possible to execute a dialogue CU effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the second conversation control is executed in any one of the first mode, the second mode, or the third mode. be able to. As shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), the expectation of a big hit is high in the relationship of the first mode<second mode<third mode. On the other hand, in the first conversation preview effect, it is not possible to execute the dialogue CU effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit.

According to such a configuration, in the second conversation preview effect, the dialogue of each character is displayed using the first dialogue telop display area TLE1 at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 and the second dialogue telop display area TLE2 at the top of the screen. By displaying the display, the dialogue CU effect can be emphasized more than the background image, and the player can easily recognize that the dialogue CU effect is being executed.

(Effect 7)
As shown in FIG. 9-26, when the display result of the pending memory is "big hit" (step S04TM2170: YES), the number of times of execution of the variable display until reaching the relief time reduction is 4 times or less. In some cases (step S04TM2190: NO), the process (step S04TM2202) of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect is executed, so the execution of the fixed pending effect is restricted.

According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display until reaching the relief time reduction is 4 times or less, when it is determined as a ``jackpot'', the fixed suspension performance is not executed, thereby reducing the relief time. When reaching , it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding, and when the number of executions of the variable display until reaching the relief time reduction is 4 times or less, when it is determined to be “off”, the arrival suspension effect is performed. By being executed, the player can be convinced that the relief time will be shortened, and the interest can be improved.

(Effect 7-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-29, when the arrival pending effect or the confirmed pending effect is executed, the dream-dreamed pending display PD1M, which is the display mode related to the first character CA1, is displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a situation advantageous to the player (first conversation announcement effect, second conversation announcement effect, battle effect, SP movie effect, etc.) is occurring, the By displaying the dream-and-dream hold display PD1M associated with the first character CA1 to be played, it is possible to improve the special feeling of the arrival hold effect and the fixed hold effect, thereby enhancing the interest.

(Effect 7-2)
As shown in FIG. 9-3 (3), when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is "big hit", "3R normal big hit" and "3R time-saving big hit" are available as the big hit types. Yes, 50% of the time, it is determined as a “3R normal jackpot”, and 50% of the time, it is determined as a “3R short-time jackpot”. That is, when a big hit occurs, time saving control (0 times) is not performed at a rate of 50%, but time saving control (200 times) is performed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, from the viewpoint of time saving control, the relationship of "3R normal jackpot"<"3R time saving jackpot" is advantageous for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-26, in the second special determination process in the 2A embodiment, if the display result of the pending storage is "jackpot" (step S04TM2170: YES), the number of relief time reduction When the value of the counter is 5 or more (step S04TM2190: YES), the process (step S04TM2200) of determining whether or not to execute the fixed pending effect can be executed, so the fixed pending effect can be executed. Regardless of which jackpot type the jackpot type is, the fixed pending performance can be executed, so when the fixed pending performance is executed, both the ``3R normal jackpot'' and the ``3R time-saving jackpot'' are generated. there is a possibility.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute the fixed pending performance regardless of the jackpot type, the chances of executing the fixed pending performance can be increased, and when the fixed pending performance is executed, any jackpot type can be executed. It is possible to play the game with expectation of whether the game is true or not, and to enhance the interest of the fixed holding performance.

(Effect 7-3)
As shown in FIG. 9-41, after the power is turned on, if it is controlled to the normal state (normal mode), the period until the jackpot occurs before reaching the relief time reduction and until the relief time reduction is reached During the period, the count display (specific number of times display) is not displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to accurately recognize which number of times the relief time is reached, and a specific player (for example, referring to the data counter only immediately after turning on the power) It is possible to prevent the player playing the game from becoming too advantageous. On the other hand, although it is not possible to accurately recognize whether or not it is a hot start, in a situation where the player can guess about which number of fluctuations will reach the relief time reduction, the variable display until the relief time reduction is reached When the number of times of execution is 4 times or less, it is possible to prevent a player from erroneously recognizing that the saving time is reached by not executing the fixed holding performance when it is determined as a ``big win''.

(Effect 8)
As shown in FIG. 9-4, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 5 or more and the display result is "big hit", the resurrection effect is executed in the variation pattern determination table referred to. Since the variation pattern of ``super reach B jackpot'' is included, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of ``super reach B jackpot'', while the value of the relief time reduction counter is 4 or less, and displayed Since the variation pattern of ``super reach B jackpot'' in which the resurrection effect is executed is not included in the variation pattern determination table referred to when the result is ``jackpot'', the variation pattern of ``super reach B jackpot'' cannot be determined. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (3), when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is "jackpot", time saving control (200 times) is performed at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the relief time reduction is reached, time reduction control (200 times) is performed at a rate of 100% (not shown). That is, in the variable display just before reaching the relief time reduction, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is "big hit", and the percentage of 50% is exceeded due to time reduction control (jackpot type is "3R time reduction big hit" (It must be determined that the jackpot type is "3R short-time jackpot"). On the other hand, if it reaches the relief time reduction, it will be controlled to reduce the time. Therefore, in many cases, the player expects to reach the relief time reduction rather than the occurrence of a big hit in the variable display immediately before the relief time reduction is reached.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 4 or less, the display result of the pending storage is controlled to the time-saving state B by reaching the relief time-saving rather than becoming a "jackpot". In a situation favorable to the player, the resurrection performance is not executed, so that the player is relieved once by suggesting that the big win will not occur, and then the player is discouraged by suggesting that the big win will finally occur. It is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

(Effect 9)
As shown in FIG. 9-34, in the fluctuation start effect determination process, if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 4 or less (step S04TM2310: YES), the process of determining whether or not to execute the fixed cut-in effect ( Step S04TM2320) is not executed (skipped). That is, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 4 or less, the fixed cut-in effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 4 or less, it is better to be controlled to the time-saving state B by reaching the relief time-saving rather than the display result of the pending memory becomes a "jackpot". To prevent a player from being discouraged by suggesting the occurrence of a big win due to the fact that a fixed cut-and-run performance is not executed in a situation favorable to the player, and to provide the player with a performance executed in a variable display to the end. can draw attention.

(Effect 9-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-26, in the second special determination process in the 2A embodiment, if the display result of the pending storage is "jackpot" (step S04TM2170: YES), the relief time reduction number counter When the value is 5 or more (step S04TM2190: YES), by executing the process (step S04TM2200) of determining whether or not to execute the fixed pending effect, the fixed pending effect can be executed.

On the other hand, when the display result of the suspension memory is "big hit" (step S04TM2170: YES) and when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 4 or less (step S04TM2190: NO), a fixed suspension effect is performed. By executing the process of determining not to execute (step S04TM2202), the execution of the fixed pending effect is restricted.

According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display until reaching the relief time reduction is 4 times or less, when it is determined as a ``jackpot'', the fixed suspension performance is not executed, thereby reducing the relief time. When reaching , it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding, and when the number of executions of the variable display until reaching the relief time reduction is 4 times or less, when it is determined to be “off”, the arrival suspension effect is performed. By being executed, the player can be convinced that the relief time will be shortened, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, not limited to such a form, in the second special determination process, when adopting the configuration of executing the process of determining whether or not to execute various pre-reading advance notice effects including fixed pending effects, the display result of the pending memory is a "jackpot" (step S04TM2170: YES), and if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 5 or more (step S04TM2190: YES), the table referred to in this process contains "fixed pending effect If the display result of the pending memory is "jackpot" (step S04TM2170: YES) and the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 4 or less (step S04TM2190: NO), by adopting a configuration in which the table referred to in this process does not include the item "related to whether or not the fixed pending effect is executed", the fixed pending effect is executed according to the value of the relief time reduction counter. may be restricted.

(Effect 10)
As shown in FIG. 9-37, in the second special determination process in the 2B embodiment, if the display result of any of the reserved memories including the reserved memory is "big hit" (step S04TM2110: YES), No matter what the value of the relief time reduction number counter is, the arrival suspension effect is not executed by executing the process (step S04TM2132) of determining not to perform the arrival suspension effect.

According to such a configuration, when the relevant reserved memory reaches the saving time, the display result of one of the reserved memories whose variable display is executed before the relevant reserved memory is a "big hit". In this case, a big hit is made in any of the suspended memories in which variable display is executed before the suspended memories scheduled to reach the relief time-saving by not executing the arrival suspension performance for the suspended memories scheduled to reach the relief time-saving. occurs, and in a situation where the relief time reduction is not finally reached, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the relief time reduction is reached.

(Effect 10-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-39, when the pending memory reaches the rescue time reduction, one of the pending memories in which the variable display is executed before the pending memory is a "big hit" , the arrival pending effect is not executed for the pending memory scheduled to reach the relief time reduction, so that the first pending display PD1 in the normal mode as the pending display corresponding to the pending memory is displayed in the first pending display area. Displayed on PD1E.

According to such a configuration, when the relevant reserved memory reaches the saving time, the display result of one of the reserved memories whose variable display is executed before the relevant reserved memory is a "big hit". In this case, a big hit is made in any of the suspended memories in which variable display is executed before the suspended memories scheduled to reach the relief time-saving by not executing the arrival suspension performance for the suspended memories scheduled to reach the relief time-saving. occurs, and in a situation where the relief time reduction is not finally reached, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the relief time reduction is reached.

(Effect 11)
As shown in FIG. 9-37, in the second special determination process in the 2B embodiment, if the display result of any of the reserved memories including the reserved memory is "big hit" (step S04TM2110: YES), No matter what the value of the relief time reduction number counter is, the arrival suspension effect is not executed by executing the process (step S04TM2132) of determining not to perform the arrival suspension effect.

In addition, when the display result of the relevant reserved memory is "big hit" (step S04TM2170: YES), and the display result of any of the reserved memories whose variable display is executed prior to the relevant reserved memory is "big hit". In (step S04TM2180: YES), by executing the process (step S04TM2202) of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect, the fixed pending effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, when the display result of the pending memory in which the variable display is executed before the pending memory is determined to be a "jackpot", the pending memory is scheduled to reach the relief time in a short time. and when the display result of the pending memory is determined to be a ``jackpot'', the pending memory reaches the relief time in a short time by not executing the arrival pending performance and the fixed pending performance for the pending memory. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game is done, and to reduce interest when a big win occurs in the variable display for the reserved memory in which the variable display is executed before the reserved memory. can be prevented.

(Effect 12)
As shown in FIG. 9-26, in the second special determination process in the 2A embodiment, if the display result of any of the reserved memories including the reserved memory is "big hit" (step S04TM2110: YES), No matter what the value of the relief time reduction number counter is, the arrival suspension effect is not executed by executing the process (step S04TM2132) of determining not to perform the arrival suspension effect.

In addition, when the display result of the pending memory is "big hit" (step S04TM2170: YES) and the pending memory is the relief time short arrival fluctuation (step S04TM2190: NO), it is determined not to execute the fixed pending effect. By executing the process (step S04TM2202), the fixed pending effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, the display result is determined to be a "big hit", and the arrival pending effect and the fixed pending effect for the pending memory scheduled to arrive in a short relief time are not executed, so that the pending memory It is possible to prevent misunderstanding by the player when the relief time reduction is reached.

(Effect 13)
As shown in FIG. 9-43, in the third special judgment process in the 3A embodiment, when the display result of the holding memory is "3R time saving jackpot" (step S04TM3110: YES), execution of fixed holding effect Since the process of determining the presence or absence (step S04TM2200) can be executed, the fixed pending effect can be executed.

On the other hand, when the display result of the pending memory is "3R normal jackpot" (step S04TM3110: NO), the process (step S04TM2202) of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect is executed, so the fixed pending effect is executed. don't run

According to such a configuration, in a situation where it is preferable for the player to be controlled to the time saving state B by reaching the relief time saving rather than the display result of the holding memory becoming a "jackpot", the same effect as the arrival holding production Even when the fixed reserved performance, which is a performance mode, is executed, the display result of the reserved storage in which the fixed reserved performance is executed is ``3R time-saving jackpot'', so that the player's dissatisfaction can be prevented.

(Effect 13-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-43, in the third special determination process in the 3A embodiment, if the display result of the pending storage is "3R time saving jackpot" (step S04TM3110: YES), and the number of relief time saving times When the value of the counter is 5 or more (step S04TM2190: YES), the decision pending effect can be executed by executing the process (step S04TM2200) of determining whether or not to execute the fixed pending effect.

On the other hand, when the display result of the pending memory is "3R normal jackpot" (step S04TM3110: NO), by executing the process (step S04TM2202) of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect, the fixed pending effect is executed. restricts the execution of

According to such a configuration, when the ``3R normal jackpot'' is determined, the occurrence of the jackpot is suggested by not executing the fixed holding performance, while the player is disappointed when the time-saving control is not performed after the jackpot. It is possible to prevent giving, and when the ``3R time-saving big win'' is determined, by executing the fixed holding performance, it is possible to suggest the occurrence of the big win and make sure that the time-saving control will be performed after the big win. , can improve interest.

It should be noted that, not limited to such a form, in the third special determination process, when adopting a configuration for executing a process for determining whether or not to execute various pre-reading advance notice effects including fixed pending effects, the display result of the pending memory is a "3R time-saving jackpot" (step S04TM3110: YES), the table referred to in this process includes an item "related to execution or non-execution of fixed pending effect", and the display result of the pending memory is "3R If it is a normal jackpot" (step S04TM3110: NO), by adopting a configuration in which the table referred to in this process does not include the item "related to whether or not the fixed pending effect is executed", depending on the jackpot type It may be possible to limit the execution of the fixed pending effect.

(Effect 14)
As shown in FIG. 9-44, in the third special determination process in the 3B embodiment, when the variation pattern of the pending memory is not "super reach B jackpot" (step S04TM3120: NO), execution of fixed pending effect A process of determining the presence or absence (step S04TM2200) can be executed. That is, when the variation pattern is not the "super reach B jackpot" in which the resurrection effect is executed, the fixed pending effect can be executed.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the pending storage is "super reach B jackpot" (step S04TM3120: YES), the process of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2202) is executed, so the fixed pending effect is executed. do not run That is, when the variation pattern is not the ``super reach B jackpot'' in which the resurrection performance is executed (when the variation pattern is the ``normal reach jackpot'' or the ``super reach A jackpot''), the fixed suspension performance can be executed.

In addition, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "big hit", the variation time of the "normal reach big hit" variation pattern is 45 seconds, the variation time of the "super reach A big hit" variation pattern is 120 seconds, and the "super reach B The variation time of the variation pattern of "big hit" is set to 150 seconds (not shown).

According to such a configuration, in a state where the player recognizes that the display result is the "3R time-saving big hit" by the fixed pending effect, the final display result is the "big hit". It is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnecessary excitement caused by the execution of the variable display of the variable pattern of "super reach B jackpot" with a long variable time.

(Effect 15)
As shown in FIG. 9-46, in the jackpot FF effect determination process, when the fixed pending effect execution flag is set (step S04TM3210: YES), the promotion effect is not executed, and the SP movie is displayed. A determination process (step S04TM3240) is being executed. That is, when the fixed pending performance is executed for the variable display in which the big win FF performance determination processing is executed and the big win occurs, the execution of the promotion performance is restricted and the SP movie performance is executed.

According to such a configuration, the promotion performance is executed in a state where the player recognizes that the display result is the ``3R time-saving jackpot'' by the fixed suspension performance, and the player feels useless excitement. You can prevent it from happening.

(Effect 16)
As shown in FIG. 9-50, in the fourth special determination process in the fourth embodiment, regardless of the effect mode, since the process (step S04TM2140) for determining whether or not to execute the arrival pending effect is executed, the arrival A pending effect can be executed.

Also, when the effect mode is the "default mode" (step S04TM4110: NO), the process of determining whether or not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2200) can be executed, so the fixed pending effect can be executed.

On the other hand, when the effect mode is "prefetch off mode" (step S04TM4110: YES), the process of determining not to execute the fixed pending effect (step S04TM2202) is executed, so the fixed pending effect is not executed.

That is, when the effect mode is the "default mode", the reachable pending effect can be executed, and the fixed pending effect can also be executed. On the other hand, when the production mode is the "prefetching off mode", it is possible to execute the arrival suspension production, and limit the execution of the finalization suspension production.

According to such a configuration, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to execute the fixed pending effect, and the interest of the effect suggesting a big win can be improved according to the player's preference.

(Effect 16-1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-3 (1) and (2), the hit occurrence rate of the variable display of the first special symbol is 1/319.7 (jackpot probability: 1/319.7), and the second The probability of occurrence of a big hit in the variable display of special symbols is about 1/1.1 (the combined probability of the probability of a big win: 1/319.7 and the probability of a small win: 1/1.1). The case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is more advantageous than the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 (3) to (5), the jackpot type (number of rounds) generated in the variable display of the first special symbol is 3 rounds at a rate of 100%. 2. The jackpot types (number of rounds) of the jackpots generated in the variable display of the 2 special symbols are 3 rounds at a rate of 20% and 10 rounds at a rate of 80%. The case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed is more advantageous than the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

In addition, the jackpot type (with or without time saving control) of the jackpot generated in the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled at a rate of 50%, and a jackpot that is controlled at a rate of 50%. (Short-time jackpot). In addition, the jackpot type (with or without time saving control) of the jackpot generated in the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled at a rate of 20%, and a jackpot that is controlled at a rate of 80%. (Short-time jackpot). Therefore, in terms of the presence or absence of time saving control after a big hit, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is more advantageous than the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

According to such a configuration, when the player selects the "prefetching off mode" as the production mode, it is possible to suitably reduce the execution frequency of the prefetching notice production according to the taste of the player. In the pachinko game machine 1 in which it is more advantageous to perform the variable display of the second special symbol than to perform the variable display of the first special symbol, the unnecessary first special symbol is displayed in spite of being controlled to the time saving state B. It is possible to prevent the corresponding first reservation memory from starting winning, and when the relief time saving is reached and the time saving state B is controlled, the variable display of the second special pattern can be started immediately, and the performance mode is ". A player who selects "look-ahead off mode" can secure a friendly playability so as not to be at a disadvantage.

This specification may or may not adopt a configuration in which each embodiment of the present disclosure is combined.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, in the first conversation preview effect, when each character is positioned at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, conversation control (first conversation control, second conversation control) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and conversation control is executed when each character is positioned in an area different from the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in the first conversation announcement effect. may be

For example, in the first conversation preview effect, conversation control may be executed while each character is moving toward the center of the screen of the image display device 5 .

(2) In the above embodiment, the display of each character in the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is terminated when the first conversation preview effect is terminated. The effect mode may be different from the effect mode in which the display of each character in the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 ends when the first conversation preview effect ends.

For example, when the first conversation preview effect ends, each character in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 may be moved out of the frame from the left side of the screen, or the characters in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 may be moved out of the frame. One character may be moved out of the frame from the left part of the screen, and the second character in the center part of the screen of the image display device 5 may be moved out of the frame from the right part of the screen.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the dialogue CU effect of the second conversation preview effect is executed, the display color of the second dialogue telop is changed without changing the display mode of the second character. However, without being limited to such a form, the dialogue CU effect of the second conversation preview effect may be executed in another effect mode.

For example, when the dialogue CU effect of the second conversation preview effect is executed, the second character and the second dialogue telop are enlarged and displayed, and the display color of the enlarged and displayed second dialogue telop is changed. It can be a performance.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, in the conversation preview effects (first conversation preview effect, second conversation preview effect, battle preview effect), an example was shown in which a conversation is established as the content of the lines of each character. Without being limited to such a form, in the conversation preview effect, the dialogue does not have to be established as the content of the dialogue of each character.

For example, in the first conversation preview effect and the battle conversation preview effect, the conversation is established as the content of the dialogue of each character, while in the second conversation preview effect in which the dialogue CU effect can be executed, the content of the dialogue of each character is established. The conversation does not have to be established as The dialogue CU production of the second conversation preview production is a production that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by the display color of the dialogue telop and the content of the dialogue. Even if is not established, the line telop may be focused only when the line CU effect is executed.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the arrival suspension effect is executed for the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction (variable display where the relief time reduction counter = 0), but is limited to such a form. Instead, the arrival suspension effect may be executed for a variable display different from the variable display that reaches the relief time saving.

For example, the arrival suspension effect may be executed targeting the variable display before reaching the relief time saving. In this case, for example, the arrival suspension effect may be executed for the variable display (relief time reduction number counter = 1, 2, 3, 4) before reaching the relief time reduction.

In addition, the arrival suspension effect may be executed targeting the variable display after reaching the relief time saving. In this case, for example, the variable display after reaching the relief time reduction (the variable display next to the variable display in which the relief time reduction counter is set to 0) may be executed as the target of the arrival suspension effect.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the presentation modes of the arrival suspension presentation and the confirmation suspension presentation are common presentation modes in which the dream mode suspension display is displayed. However, the effect mode of the arrival suspension effect and the fixed suspension effect may not be a common effect mode.

For example, the arrival pending effect may display a dream-like white pending display, while the determination pending effect may display a dream-like rainbow-colored pending display.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution of the fixed pending effect is restricted depending on whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is equal to or less than "4", which is the maximum value of the first pending memory number. However, not limited to such a form, depending on whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is a value different from "4" which is the maximum value of the first reservation memory number, execution of the fixed reservation effect may be restricted.

For example, depending on whether the value of the relief time-saving number counter is "2" or less, the execution of the fixed suspension effect may be restricted, and whether the relief time-saving number counter value is "10" or less , the execution of the fixed suspension effect may be restricted, and the execution of the fixed suspension effect may be restricted depending on whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is equal to or less than "100".

(8) In the above-described embodiment, (i) [1st kind of jackpot] is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display being "big hit", and (ii) the display result of the variable display is " A small winning game state is set based on the fact that a small winning has occurred, a state in which a game medium can enter a V winning area in a V winning device is established, and a big winning is achieved based on the entry of the game medium into the V winning area. The gaming machine is equipped with a [2 types of jackpot] that controls the gaming state. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment shows an example of a [first-class + two-class mixed machine] having a pattern of [first-class jackpot] and [two-class jackpot] as a pattern for controlling the (i+ii) jackpot gaming state. However, without being limited to such a form, various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied to gaming machines having different game characteristics.

(8-1) For example, the effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied to a game machine having a [V-ST machine] game feature. In the [V-ST machine], after the game ball wins a variable V prize ball device (V lid) described later in the first round of the jackpot game state, it enters the V prize mouth, so that after the jackpot game ends This is a gaming machine having a game property in which variable probability control, which will be described later, is executed over a maximum of 70 times of variable display.

As the game state, a low probability state and a non-time saving state "normal state" (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable control is not executed (game state)" as appropriate), a high probability state, and a time saving state "Probability variation state" (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation control is executed (game state)" as appropriate.) And, shall be provided. For example, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/319.7, and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is set to 1/40.

Then, in the [V-ST machine], the probability variable state is the end of any one of the execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) or the start of the next big hit game state Continue until the condition is met first.

In addition, as the jackpot types, a "normal jackpot" in which the variable probability control is not executed and a "variable probability big hit" in which the variable probability control is executed are provided.

Also, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided inside the big winning hole. Since the mechanism of the variable V winning ball device is the same as that of the V judgment winning device 87, description thereof is omitted. The open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state (for example, 0.1 seconds) with a short open period and a long open state with a long open period (for example, 15 seconds). ). In the ``normal big win'', the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the big winning game state, and in the ``probable variable big win'', the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the big winning game state. shall be For example, the "normal jackpot" includes a "3R normal jackpot" in which the number of rounds is three.

The big win game state by the "normal big win" is a normal open big win in which the big winning opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first to third rounds. In addition, in the "normal jackpot", the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control cannot be executed. Since it cannot be expected, it becomes a substantial "normal jackpot".

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win" is a normal open big win that changes the big winning port to an open state advantageous to the player in the 1st to 3rd rounds/10th round. In addition, in the "variable probability big hit", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy to let the game ball enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit. For example, the "variable probability jackpot" includes a "3R variable probability jackpot" with 3 rounds and a "10R probability fluctuation jackpot" with 10 rounds.

When a big hit occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it is determined as a ``3R normal big hit'' at a rate of 50%, and as a ``3R time-saving big hit'' at a rate of 50%. Also, when a big hit occurs based on the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined as a "10R probability variable big hit" at a rate of 100%.

In such a [V-ST machine] gaming machine, various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(8-2) Also, the effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine having the [V-variable machine] game feature. In [V-probability variable machine], a normal state that is a low probability state and a probability variation state that is a high probability state (game state in which probability variation control is executed) shall be provided. As the jackpot types, "normal jackpot" in which variable probability control is not executed and "variable probability big hit" in which variable probability control is executed are provided. [V-probability changer], after the game ball wins the variable V prize ball device (V cover) described above in the first round of the jackpot game state, by entering the V prize opening, after the jackpot game ends This is a game machine having a game property in which variable probability control is executed over a period until the next big hit occurs.

When a big hit occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it is determined as a ``3R normal big hit'' at a rate of 50%, and as a ``3R time-saving big hit'' at a rate of 50%. Also, when a big hit occurs based on the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined as a "10R normal big hit" at a rate of 20%, and is determined as a "10R probability variable big hit" at a rate of 80%.

In the gaming machine of such [V-variable machine], various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(9) In the above embodiment, two types of production modes ("default mode", "prefetch off mode") are shown as production modes, but not limited to such a form, production mode Three or more types of production modes may be set as .

For example, a "premium up mode" may be set as the third type of effect mode. The production mode of the "premium up mode" is a production mode in which the big hit confirmation production (premium production) is executed at a rate higher than the normal rate. In the premier-up mode, the execution frequency of the premier presentation is high, so this presentation mode is for players who want to be notified of the display result at an early stage when a big win occurs. For example, when the production mode is the "premium up mode", the execution ratio of the fixed pending production is higher than when the production mode is the "default mode".

(10) In the above embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol is a "jackpot" and that the relief time saving has been reached, the time saving state (time saving state A, time saving state B). Although the example controlled was shown, it may be controlled to a time saving state based on not only such a form but the opportunity mentioned above.

For example, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbols, "loss with time saving" may be provided. When the lost pattern with time saving is stopped and displayed, the time saving control is controlled to the time saving state C (for example, "explosion RUSH mode" of 200 times of time saving times) in which the time saving control is performed a predetermined number of times.

The characteristic portion 04TM described above includes the following configurations.

The game machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state),
Production control means for executing production (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The production control means is
a background image (normal background image) can be displayed on the display means from a state in which variable display is not performed to a state in which variable display is performed;
When the variable display is being executed, a conversation preview effect (first conversation preview) in which a first character (first character CA1) and a second character (second character CA2) superimposed and displayed on the background image have a conversation. directing) can be executed,
In the conversation preview production,
A first dialogue display (first dialogue telop) corresponding to the first character and a second dialogue display (second dialogue telop) corresponding to the second character are displayed in a common area (image display device 5) of the display means. can be displayed in the common dialogue telop display area at the bottom of the screen),
An image in which the first character speaks when the first dialogue display is displayed can be displayed on the display means (when the first dialogue telop is displayed, the first character CA1 speaks). and when the second dialogue display is displayed, an image in which the second character speaks can be displayed on the display means (when the second dialogue telop is displayed, the second character speaks). CA2 is acting to speak)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of characters are having a conversation, it is possible to display the lines corresponding to each character in the common area of the display means instead of the specific area corresponding to each character. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the background image from being excessively lowered. In addition, when the dialogue display corresponding to each character is displayed in the common area, each character speaks, thereby eliminating the monotony of the production in which the characters converse and which character speaks. It becomes easy to make the player recognize whether there is a dolphin.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine of means 1,
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R) are provided,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
In the conversation preview effect (first conversation preview effect),
a first sound effect (first speech sound) corresponding to the first character and a second sound effect (second speech sound) corresponding to the second character can be output from the sound output means;
A first control for displaying the first dialogue display on the display means and outputting the first effect sound from the sound output means (displaying the first dialogue telop in the common dialogue telop display area of the image display device 5, A first dialogue control for reproducing and outputting the first dialogue voice from the speakers 8L and 8R), and a second control for displaying the second dialogue display on the display means and outputting the second effect sound from the sound output means ( Second conversation control for displaying the second dialogue telop in the common dialogue telop display area of the image display device 5 and reproducing and outputting the second dialogue sound from the speakers 8L and 8R),
It is possible to move the first character from the first position of the display means (the right part of the screen of the image display device 5) to a predetermined area (the center part of the screen of the image display device 5),
When the first character moves to the predetermined area, the first control can be executed (when the first character CA1 moves from the right part of the screen of the image display device 5 to the center part of the screen, the first conversation control),
It is possible to move the second character from the second position of the display means (the left part of the screen of the image display device 5) to the predetermined area (the center part of the screen of the image display device 5),
When the first character moves to the predetermined area and the second character moves to the predetermined area, the second control can be executed (the second character CA2 can be displayed from the left part of the screen of the image display device 5). When moving to the center of the screen, the second conversation control is executed),
When the first character and the second character are positioned in the predetermined area, the first control can be executed a plurality of times, and the second control can be executed a plurality of times (the first character When CA1 and the second character CA2 are positioned at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the first conversation control is executed three times and the second conversation control is executed three times.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by moving the first character to the predetermined area of the display means, the first control can be executed in a state in which the player's attention is focused on the first character. The production effect of the first control can be enhanced. Further, by moving the second character to the predetermined area, the second control can be executed while the player's attention is focused on the second character, and the effect of the second control corresponding to the second character is enhanced. be able to. By executing each of the first control and the second control a plurality of times while the first character and the second character are positioned in the predetermined area, the effect of the first control and the second control can be obtained. can be further enhanced.

The game machine of means 3 is
A game machine of means 1 or 2,
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R) are provided,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
a suggestive effect (battle effect) suggesting whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed on the display means;
In the suggestive effect (battle effect), a special conversation preview effect (battle conversation preview effect) in which a third character (first character CA1) and a fourth character (enemy character CB) have a conversation can be executed,
In the special conversation notice effect (battle conversation notice effect),
A third dialogue display (first dialogue telop) corresponding to the third character and a fourth dialogue display (third dialogue telop) corresponding to the fourth character are displayed in the common area (image display device) of the display means. It can be displayed in the common dialogue telop display area at the bottom of the screen in 5),
A third effect sound (first dialogue sound) corresponding to the third character and a fourth effect sound (third dialogue sound) corresponding to the fourth character are output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R). A gaming machine characterized by being capable of outputting.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of characters converse in the suggestive effect, the dialogue display corresponding to each character is displayed in the common area of the display means, and the effect sound corresponding to each character is output. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the speech and the effect sound peculiar to the character without lowering the visibility of the background image, and to improve the interest when it is suggested whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of means 4 is
A game machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
the background image includes a specific object (normally, a star-shaped object can be displayed in the background image);
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute a related production (normal background chance-up production) related to the specific object,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the related performance is executed than when the related performance is not executed (usually, the background chance-up performance is a performance suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high. ),
The specific object is more visible than a predetermined object (other objects (sun, mountain, etc.) normally included in the background image, objects related to variable display such as suspended display and active display not normally included in the background image). A gaming machine characterized by low

According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the details of the background image by executing the related effect using the specific object with relatively low visibility, and the background image is displayed. It can improve the interest of time.

The game machine of means 5 is
A game machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
Reservation storage means (RAM 102) for storing, as a reservation storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
Determining means (CPU 103 for executing big hit determination at the time of starting winning) for determining whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state before the variable display is executed; a normal background image) and a second background image (special background image) different from the first background image,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) displays the second background image before the variable display corresponding to the pending memory that is the object of the determination is executed based on the determination by the determination means. It can be displayed on the means (it is possible to execute a zone effect as a pre-reading notice effect and display a special background image),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the second background image is displayed than when the first background image is displayed (when the zone effect is executed, the expectation of a big win is high) suggesting that
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state differs depending on the type of background image, so that it is possible to improve interest when the background image is displayed.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
A game machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
As the conversation preview effects, there are a first conversation preview effect (first conversation preview effect) and a second conversation preview effect (second conversation preview effect) different from the first conversation preview effect,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
In the second conversation preview effect (second conversation preview effect), the first dialogue display (first dialogue telop) corresponding to the first character is displayed in the first area of the display means (the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5). 1 speech telop display area), and a second speech display (second speech telop) corresponding to the second character can be displayed in a second area (of the image display device 5) different from the first area of the display means. It can be displayed in the second dialogue telop display area at the top of the screen),
An image in which the first character speaks when the first dialogue display is displayed can be displayed on the display means (when the first dialogue telop is displayed, the first character CA1 speaks). and when the second dialogue display is displayed, an image in which the second character speaks can be displayed on the display means (when the second dialogue telop is displayed, the second character speaks). CA2 is acting to speak),
It is possible to execute a special effect (line chance up effect),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the special performance is executed than when the special performance is not executed (the dialogue chance-up performance is a performance suggesting a high degree of expectation for a big win). ,
The effect control means can execute the special effect in the second conversation preview effect while not executing the special effect in the first conversation preview effect (the dialogue chance-up effect is executed in the first conversation preview effect). On the other hand, it is possible to execute the dialogue chance up production in the second conversation announcement production)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, in the second conversation preview effect, the dialogue display of each character is displayed using the first area and the second area of the display means, thereby emphasizing the special effect rather than the background image. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the special effect is being executed.

The game machine of means 7 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state),
Reservation storage means (RAM 102) for storing, as a reservation storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
Determination means (CPU 103 for determining a big hit at the time of start-up winning) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display is executed;
A state control means (CPU 103) that can control a normal state and a special state (time saving state B) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than the normal state;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The state control means can be controlled to the special state when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times (when the relief time is reached (after the previous big hit occurs or the RAM is cleared). When the variable display is executed 950 times from), it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving)),
The reserved storage means can store up to a specified number of reserved memories (four first reserved memories),
The production control means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the control is to be in the advantageous state, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed (if it is determined to be a big hit at the time of starting winning, a fixed pending effect can be executed) is),
When the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number, the specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed (when the relief time is reached, the arrival suspension effect can be executed),
When the number of executions of variable display until reaching the predetermined number of times is less than the specified number of times corresponding to the specified number, and the determining means determines that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the determination is performed. Do not execute the specific effect for the corresponding reserved memory (when the number of times of execution of the variable display until reaching the relief time reduction is 4 times or less, and it is determined to be a big hit at the time of starting winning, the big hit determination is performed Do not execute the fixed pending effect for the corresponding first pending memory)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display based on the reserved memory until reaching the predetermined number of times is less than the specified number of times, the specific effect is not executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state. Thus, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding by the player when the number of executions of the variable display based on the reserved memory reaches the predetermined number of times, and the number of executions of the variable display based on the reserved memory until reaching the predetermined number of times is higher than the predetermined number of times. When it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state when the number is small, the player can be convinced that the number of executions of the variable display based on the reserved memory reaches a predetermined number by executing the specific performance. , can improve interest.

The game machine of means 8 is
The gaming machine of means 7,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
After suggesting that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a relief effect (resurrection effect) that suggests that it will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the number of executions of the variable display until reaching the predetermined number of times is less than the specified number of times, and the determination means determines that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the relief effect is not performed (relief effect). When the number of executions of the variable display until reaching the time saving is 4 times or less, and it is determined as a big hit at the time of the start winning, the resurrection effect is not executed in the variable display corresponding to the big hit determination)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of variable display until the predetermined number of times is reached is less than the specified number of times, the number of executions of variable display based on the reserved memory is set to the predetermined number of times rather than the reserved memory is controlled in an advantageous state. In a situation where it is preferable for the player to be controlled to a special state by reaching the number of times, the player is put into an advantageous state after the player is relieved by suggesting that the relief performance is not executed to prevent the control to be in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by suggesting that the player will be controlled, and from giving unnecessary stress to the player.

The game machine of means 9 is
The game machine of means 7 or 8,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a fixed effect (fixed cut-in effect) that suggests that the control is in the advantageous state,
When the number of executions of variable display until reaching the predetermined number of times is less than the specified number of times, and when the judgment means judges that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the fixed effect is not executed (relief When the number of executions of the variable display until reaching the time saving is 4 times or less, and it is determined as a big hit at the time of the start winning, the fixed cut-in effect is not executed in the variable display corresponding to the big hit determination)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of variable display until the predetermined number of times is reached is less than the specified number of times, the number of executions of variable display based on the reserved memory is set to the predetermined number of times rather than the reserved memory is controlled in an advantageous state. To prevent a player from being discouraged by suggesting control to an advantageous state due to non-execution of a fixed performance in a situation where it is preferable for the player to be controlled to a special state by reaching the number of times. It is possible to keep the player's attention until the end of the effect executed by the variable display.

The game machine of means 10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state),
Reservation storage means (RAM 102) for storing, as a reservation storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
Determination means (CPU 103 for determining a big hit at the time of start-up winning) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display is executed;
A state control means (CPU 103) that can control a normal state and a special state (time saving state B) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than the normal state;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The state control means can be controlled to the special state when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times (when the relief time is reached (after the previous big hit occurs or the RAM is cleared). When the variable display is executed 950 times from), it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving)),
The reserved storage means can store up to a specified number of reserved memories (four first reserved memories),
The production control means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the control is to be in the advantageous state, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed (if it is determined to be a big hit at the time of starting winning, a fixed pending effect can be executed) is),
When the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number, the specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed (when the relief time is reached, the arrival suspension effect can be executed),
When it is determined by the determining means that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state, and when the number of executions of the variable display until reaching the predetermined number of times is less than the specified number of times corresponding to the specified number of times, the predetermined number of times Do not execute the specific effect targeting the reserved memory corresponding to the variable display of the eyes (there is a first reserved memory that is determined to be a big hit at the time of the start winning, and the number of times of execution of the variable display until reaching the relief time reduction is 4 When it is less than the number of times, do not execute the arrival suspension production for the first suspension memory that reaches the relief time reduction)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the determining means that the control is to be in an advantageous state and the number of executions of the variable display until reaching the predetermined number of times is less than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of By not executing the specific performance for the reserved memory corresponding to the variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the number of execution times of the variable display of the reserved memory has reached a predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means 11 is
The gaming machine of means 10,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the holding storage different from the holding storage corresponding to the determination is the predetermined Corresponding to the variable display of the number of times, and when it is determined by the determination means that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the specific effect is not executed (the first holding memory determined as a big hit at the time of starting winning is In a certain case, when the first suspended memory reaching the relief time reduction is determined to be a big hit, the fixed suspension performance targeting the first suspension memory reaching the relief time reduction is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the determining means that the control is to be in an advantageous state, the pending memory different from the pending memory corresponding to the determination corresponds to the variable display of the predetermined number of times, In addition, when the determining means determines that the control is to be in an advantageous state, the number of executions of the variable display of the reserved memory corresponding to the predetermined number of times of variable display reaches a predetermined number of times because the specific effect is not executed. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, and control is performed in an advantageous state in the variable display for the reserved memory in which the variable display is executed before the reserved memory corresponding to the variable display of the predetermined number of times. In this case, it is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

The gaming machine of means 12 is
The game machine of means 10 or 11,
When the performance control means (performance control CPU 120) is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the pending memory corresponding to the determination corresponds to the variable display of the predetermined number of times In addition, the specific performance is not executed (when the first suspension memory that reaches the relief time reduction is determined to be a big hit, the arrival suspension performance and the fixed suspension performance targeting the first suspension memory that reaches the relief time reduction are executed do not)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the determining means that the control is to be in an advantageous state, and the reserved memory corresponding to the determination corresponds to the variable display for the predetermined number of times, the specific effect is not executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the special state is controlled due to the number of executions of the variable display of the reserved memory corresponding to the predetermined number of variable displays reaching the predetermined number of times.

The game machine of means 13 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state),
Reservation storage means (RAM 102) for storing, as a reservation storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
Determination means (CPU 103 for determining a big hit at the time of start-up winning) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display is executed;
A state control means (CPU 103) that can control a normal state and a special state (time saving state B) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than the normal state;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (3R normal jackpot) that is not controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends, and a state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state and is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends. There is a second advantageous state (3R time saving jackpot),
The state control means can be controlled to the special state when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times (when the relief time is reached (after the previous big hit occurs or the RAM is cleared). When the variable display is executed 950 times from), it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving)),
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When it is determined by the determination means that the control is to be in the advantageous state, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed (if it is determined to be a big hit at the time of starting winning, a fixed pending effect can be executed) is),
When the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number, the specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed (when the relief time is reached, the arrival suspension effect can be executed),
When the number of executions of variable display does not reach the predetermined number of times (when the relief time reduction has not reached),
When the determination means determines that the first advantageous state is controlled, the specific performance is not executed (when the display result is "3R normal big win", the fixed pending performance is not executed),
When it is determined by the determination means that the second advantageous state is controlled, the specific effect can be executed (when the display result is "3R time-saving big hit", the fixed pending effect can be executed. )
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, when it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state which is not controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends, the specific effect is not executed, and the second advantageous state is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends. 2 By executing a specific effect when it is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, the same as the specific effect executed in the case of being controlled in a special state when the number of executions of variable display reaches a predetermined number of times. is executed before the number of executions of variable display reaches a predetermined number of times, dissatisfaction of the player can be prevented.

The game machine of means 14 is
The gaming machine of means 13,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
After suggesting that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a relief effect (resurrection effect) that suggests that it will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When it is determined by the determining means that the second advantageous state is controlled and the specific performance is executed, the relief performance is not executed (the display result is ``3R time-saving big hit'', and the fixed pending performance is executed. (Does not perform the resurrection effect when
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, the player recognizes that the number of executions of the variable display has not reached the predetermined number of times due to the specific effect, and that it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. In this state, useless fanning can be stopped and interest can be prevented from deteriorating.

The game machine of means 15 is
The gaming machine of means 13 or 14,
display means (image display device 5);
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) on the display means,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
In response to being controlled to the first advantageous state, a first specific display result (combination of normal symbols "222" indicating a "3R normal jackpot", etc.) can be displayed on the display means,
In response to being controlled to the second advantageous state, a second specific display result (such as a combination of time-saving symbols "777" indicating that it is a "3R time-saving jackpot") can be displayed on the display means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
In the advantageous state, after the first specific display result is displayed, a promotion effect that can be displayed in the second specific display result (changing from the combination of normal symbols to the combination of time-saving symbols in the jackpot FF period) possible promotion) can be executed,
When it is determined by the determination means that the second advantageous state is to be controlled, and when the specific performance is executed, the promotion performance is not executed, and a special performance different from the promotion performance is executed. It is possible (when the display result is determined as "3R time-saving big hit" and the confirmed pending effect is executed, the promotion effect is not executed during the jackpot FF period, and the SP movie effect is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, the player recognizes that the number of executions of the variable display has not reached the predetermined number of times due to the specific effect, and that it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. In this state, useless fanning can be stopped and interest can be prevented from deteriorating.

The gaming machine of means 16,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state),
Reservation storage means (RAM 102) for storing, as a reservation storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
A state control means (CPU 103 that executes a big hit determination at the time of starting winning) that can be controlled between a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state;
Production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
A first production mode (default mode), a second production mode (prefetching off mode) different from the first production mode, and production mode control means (production control CPU 120) that can be controlled,
The state control means can be controlled to the special state when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times (when the relief time is reached (after the previous big hit occurs or the RAM is cleared). When the variable display is executed 950 times from), it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving)),
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When it is controlled to the first production mode (default mode),
When it is determined by the determination means that the control is to be in the advantageous state, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed (if it is determined to be a big hit at the time of starting winning, a fixed pending effect is executed. possible),
When the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times, the specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed (when the relief time is reached, the arrival suspension effect can be executed),
When it is controlled to the second effect mode (prefetching off mode),
When it is determined by the determination means that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the specific effect is not executed before the variable display is executed (if it is determined to be a big hit at the time of the start winning, the fixed pending effect is executed. figure) ,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed (when the relief time is reached, the arrival is suspended production is possible)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to such a configuration, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the interest of the specific effect can be preferably improved according to the player's taste.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state,
a pending storage means for storing, as pending storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
a state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state;
production control means capable of executing production;
A first production mode, a second production mode different from the first production mode, and production mode control means that can be controlled,
The state control means can control to the special state when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times,
The production control means is
When it is controlled to the first production mode,
When the determining means determines that the control is to be in the advantageous state, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed,
when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed;
When it is controlled to the second production mode,
When the determination means determines that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the specific effect is not executed before the variable display is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after being controlled to the advantageous state, when the number of executions of variable display reaches the predetermined number of times, a specific effect can be executed before the variable display is executed.

Images